manualshive.com logo in svg

FujiFilm CR-IR341, Service Manual

Share
Download
FujiFilm CR-IR341 Service Manual Download Page 527

CR-IR341 

Service Manual

MC - 36

009-051-04
05.31.99 FM2460

2

3

4

5

6

7

9

10

1

8

C

ONTENTS

MC - 36

■

 Adjustment

 CAUTION

Before removing the covers, be sure to turn OFF the high-voltage switch. If the machine is
powered ON with any of the covers removed, the photomultiplier will be damaged.

(1) Remove the following covers.

Lower front cover, upper right-hand side cover, lower right-hand side cover, upper left-
hand side cover, upper front cover, stack table, multi-stage cassette loading cover

 “3. Removing and Reinstalling Covers”

(2) With the cassette set unit pulled out, connect the connectors (CNA1, 2) of the cassette

set unit.

 “4.2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit”

(3) Power ON the machine.

➮

The initialization sequence is started, and, after 30 to 60 seconds have passed, a
software version number (Axx) appears on the operation panel.

(4) Immediately after the software version number (Axx) appears, touch the upper left and

upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence.

➮

 M-Utility is activated.

If “STEP 95” is indicated, any touch on the operation panel is rejected. In that case,
reset the machine and wait until the software version number (Axx) appears on the
operation panel.

(5) Select “5. MECHANICAL UTILITY” and “1. INITIALIZE” in sequence.

(6) Select “4. SENSOR” and “2. MONITOR”.

➮

 A list of sensor Nos. is displayed.

FR1H1058.EPS

CNA1

CNA2

Cassette set unit

Summary of Contents for CR-IR341

Page 1: ...FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY Service Manual CR IR341 FCR 5000 CR IR341P FCR 5000plus Printed in Japan Document No 009 051 07 1 st Edition June 20 1998 Revised Edition Aug 30 2001 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd...

Page 2: ...lm Co Ltd Miyanodai Technology Development Center FCR is a registered trademark of Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted Copyright 1998 2001 by Fuji Photo Film...

Page 3: ...de a simple easy to read layout Notation of unit symbols For notation of unit symbols metric units set forth in the International Systems of Units SI are used as a rule However some metric units that...

Page 4: ...calibrated proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed Servicing instruments and tools that require inspection calibration are as listed below Inspection calibration procedures should be...

Page 5: ...s instructed in this manual To restart the machine power it OFF and wait more than five seconds before powering it ON again If the machine is powered ON within five seconds it may shut down due to ove...

Page 6: ...part while the machine is powered When performing checks and adjustments under the powered condition exercise care against electric shock To avoid hazards do not put your hand on or into any rotating...

Page 7: ...r the procedures are completed put the protective housings and retaining screws back exactly in their original position to prevent leakage of a laser beam out of the machine Preventive maintenance for...

Page 8: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 0 3_4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 0 3_4 Safety Precaution BLANK PAGE...

Page 9: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 0 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 0 4 BLANK PAGE...

Page 10: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 0 5 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 0 5 BLANK PAGE...

Page 11: ...with Better Serviceability MD 6 3 1 E ringless Housing Employed MD 6 3 2 Snap fit Pinion Gears Employed MD 7 3 3 Simple Bearing Employed MD 8 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment MD 9 3 5 S...

Page 12: ...nit MD 46 7 13 General Description of Scanning Optics System MD 54 8 Mechanical Control Flows MD 56 1 How to Understand Control Flow MD 56 2 Routine Single IP Conveyance MD 57 2 1 Summary of Operation...

Page 13: ...Standby IP MD 144 5 9 Subscanning Grip HP Positioning MD 145 5 10 Empty Cassette Ejection MD 151 5 11 Cassette Hold Release Operation MD 152 6 Error Handling MD 153 6 1 Error Handling Cassette Ejecti...

Page 14: ...D 176 9 2 Roller Locations MD 180 9 3 IP Conveyance Locations MD 181 9 4 Home Position Values MD 182 9 5 Installation Locations for Members in Contact with IP Fluorescent Face MD 185 9 6 Data on Grip...

Page 15: ...d Slow Conveyance Error MT 84 03B5 Recovered IP Load Fast Conveyance Error MT 86 03B6 Feed Load Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error MT 88 03B7 Side Positioning Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Erro...

Page 16: ...PM Code Available MT 152 13AF IDT Line Error MT 154 13E1 Feed IP Suction Error MT 156 13E2 Feed IP Dropped 13E5 Load IP Dropped MT 158 13E3 IP Grip Error MT 160 13E4 Load IP Suction Error MT 162 2 5 I...

Page 17: ...6 Checking and Replacing Cassette Hold Sensors SA3 7 11 15 MC 38 4 7 Checking and Replacing Mammo ST Sensors SA4 8 12 16 MC 40 4 8 Checking Replacing and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids SOLA1 4 MC 4...

Page 18: ...Before Side Positioning Conveyor Rubber Rollers MC 99 6 9 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber Attached Guide of Before Side Positioning Conveyor MC 100 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit MC...

Page 19: ...ease HP Sensor SZ2 MC 186 10 7 Checking and Replacing Driven Side Grip Release HP Sensor SZ3 MC 187 10 8 Checking and Replacing Subscanning Motor MZ1 MC 188 10 9 Replacing Driving Shaft Grip Motor MZ2...

Page 20: ...TSW1 TSW2 MC 232 12 10 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan FANF1 MC 234 12 11 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan Air Filter MC 235 12 12 Checking Replacing and Adjusting Erasure Unit IP Conveyance Timing Belt M...

Page 21: ...am MC 272 16 2 MTH08A Board MC 273 16 3 CPU90E Board MC 274 16 4 IMG07B Board MC 276 16 5 IMG08A Board MC 277 16 6 IMG08B Board MC 278 16 7 IMG08C Board MC 279 16 8 DMC08A Board MC 280 16 9 HCP08A Boa...

Page 22: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 0 17 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 0 17 Contents Maintenance Checks Replacement and Adjustment of Parts BLANK PAGE 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006...

Page 23: ...peration MU 14 5 2 Menu Hierarchy of M Utility in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Error MU 22 6 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY Error Log Utility MU 24 6 1 1 LIST Displaying Error Log MU 24 6 2 2 CLEAR Clea...

Page 24: ...on MU 78 10 3 3 LASER Laser ON OFF MU 78 10 4 4 HV HV ON OFF MU 79 10 5 5 HV DATA High Voltage Setting MU 79 10 6 6 FORMAT Setting Read Start Position and Read Width MU 80 10 7 7 SHADING SENSITIVITY S...

Page 25: ...ous Data MU 116 12 5 5 EDR DATA Saving EDR Calculation to FD MU 121 12 6 6 PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE Reverting Back to Previous Version of System Software MU 123 12 7 7 EXECUTION Loading and Executing...

Page 26: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 0 21 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 0 21 Contents Maintenance Maintenance Utility BLANK PAGE 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006...

Page 27: ...IP REMOVAL UNIT 6 SP 38 INDEX 04G UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 7 SP 40 INDEX 05A BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 SP 42 INDEX 05B BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 SP 44 INDEX 05C BEFORE SIDE POSITIONI...

Page 28: ...SP 80 INDEX 10C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 SP 82 INDEX 11 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SP 84 INDEX 12A CONTROLLER 1 SP 86 INDEX 12B CONTROLLER 2 SP 88 INDEX 13 OPTION SP 90 INDEX 14 CABLE SP 92 INDEX 15 CONNECTION D...

Page 29: ...3 14 Checking Shock Absorbers of Vertical Conveyor PM 29 3 15 Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit PM 31 3 16 Pushing in Tray of Cassette Set Unit PM 32 3 17 Checking Shock Absorbers of Before Side Position...

Page 30: ...5 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 0 25 Contents Preventive Maintenance 3 33 Clearing Error Log PM 84 3 34 Turning ON High Voltage Switch Software Switch PM 85 3 35 Checking Image PM 86 4 Maintenance to Be...

Page 31: ...1 SYSTEM IRSET CFG IN 22 3 1 1 List of Setup Items of SYSTEM IRSET CFG IN 24 3 1 2 Setup Items of SYSTEM to be Changed for Second and Subsequent Machines IN 35 2 3 2 PRINT FILMFMT CFG IN 35 3 3 2 1 S...

Page 32: ...N 91 6 2 4 Procedures at Side Positioning Conveyor Subscanning Unit and Power Supply Unit IN 93 6 2 5 Procedures at Scanner Unit IN 98 6 2 6 Procedures at Controller IN 108 6 2 7 Unclamping Check List...

Page 33: ...ine IN 153 8 Final Installation and Checks IN 154 8 1 Checking IP Conveyance in M Utility IN 154 8 2 Reinstalling Covers IN 157 8 3 Final Placement IN 158 8 4 Checks after Machine Startup IN 161 8 5 C...

Page 34: ..._A3 3 Appendix 3 3 Common Operations in M Utility IN_A3 4 Appendix 3 3 1 How to Select Menu IN_A3 4 Appendix 3 3 2 How to Quit Menu IN_A3 5 Appendix 3 3 3 How to Enter Numeral Value IN_A3 6 Appendix 4...

Page 35: ...contains Adobe Systems Acrobat Reader as a their PDF viewer To view an electronic manual use Acrobat Reader bundled If any PDF viewer other than Acrobat Reader is used the image displayed on screen or...

Page 36: ...item in the paper version of the manual a document map is provided in addition to the table of contents The document map is illustratively organized so that you can visually find a location where your...

Page 37: ...cedures Based on Improper Operation Checks Replacement and Adjustment of Parts Maintenance Utility Compiled as an independent chapter in the Maintenance Volume Instructions are given on the presumptio...

Page 38: ...ror Codes 5 Machine Circuit Diagram 6 Power Supply Circuit Diagram Appendix 1 Mechanical Control Flows Compiled as one Description of Machine article in the Maintenance Volume Appendix 2 Troubleshooti...

Page 39: ...tion and search for the recovery procedure for the error code The recovery procedures are set forth in numerical order 3 Estimate the cause of the error with reference to the Cause in the Troubleshoot...

Page 40: ...bleshooting operation in accordance with the generated error code refer to the 7 Index of Error Codes at the end of 8 Mechanical Control Flows in Machine Description Volume Remedies based on descripti...

Page 41: ...ion labels specified in Part 1 J Federal Regulations Code Title 21 issued by the FDA of the U S FR1B1067 EPS EN 60825 1 1996 Class 3B Panel Label HHS Label 1 HHS Label 1 EN 60825 1 1996 Class 3B Panel...

Page 42: ...6 8620 JAPAN TOKYO 106 8620 JAPAN FR1B1043 EPS HHS Label 1 HHS Label 2 AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM Laser radiation when open DANGER FR1B1045 EPS AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM Laser radiation DANGER...

Page 43: ...08 30 2001 FM3115 0 38 Safety Labels Ratings Indication Label Manufacturer Label Acceptance Label Left hand side FR1B1035 EPS Electric Shock Warning Label EN 60825 1 1996 Class 3B Panel Label 2 Labels...

Page 44: ...2 CHOME MINATO KU 26 30 NISHIAZABU 2 CHOME MINATO KU TOKYO 106 8620 JAPAN TOKYO 106 8620 JAPAN Manufacturer Manufacturer FR1B1142 EPS List of Labels Ratings Indication Label CR IR341P CR IR341 Manufa...

Page 45: ...tical path is intentionally changed However if the optical path is changed inadvertently during optics related installation the person in charge of installation or other people around the machine may...

Page 46: ...nst Laser Exposure FR1B1049 EPS Top cover Protective Housing of Scanning Optics Unit The removable protective housing for the scanning optics unit is illustrated below Note that the single piece marke...

Page 47: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Maintenance M Machine Description MD Troubleshooting MT Checks Replacement and Adjustment of Parts MC Maintenance Utility MU...

Page 48: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 BLANK PAGE...

Page 49: ...3 New Parts with Better Serviceability MD 6 3 1 E ringless Housing Employed MD 6 3 2 Snap fit Pinion Gears Employed MD 7 3 3 Simple Bearing Employed MD 8 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustmen...

Page 50: ...cs Scanner Unit MD 46 7 13 General Description of Scanning Optics System MD 54 8 Mechanical Control Flows MD 56 1 How to Understand Control Flow MD 56 2 Routine Single IP Conveyance MD 57 2 1 Summary...

Page 51: ...fter Reading Standby IP MD 144 5 9 Subscanning Grip HP Positioning MD 145 5 10 Empty Cassette Ejection MD 151 5 11 Cassette Hold Release Operation MD 152 6 Error Handling MD 153 6 1 Error Handling Cas...

Page 52: ...Locations MD 176 9 2 Roller Locations MD 180 9 3 IP Conveyance Locations MD 181 9 4 Home Position Values MD 182 9 5 Installation Locations for Members in Contact with IP Fluorescent Face MD 185 9 6 D...

Page 53: ...ered IP Load Slow Conveyance Error MT 84 03B5 Recovered IP Load Fast Conveyance Error MT 86 03B6 Feed Load Conveyance Remaining IP Ejection Error MT 88 03B7 Side Positioning Conveyance Remaining IP Ej...

Page 54: ...0 13AE No MPM Code Available MT 152 13AF IDT Line Error MT 154 13E1 Feed IP Suction Error MT 156 13E2 Feed IP Dropped 13E5 Load IP Dropped MT 158 13E3 IP Grip Error MT 160 13E4 Load IP Suction Error M...

Page 55: ...14 MC 34 4 6 Checking and Replacing Cassette Hold Sensors SA3 7 11 15 MC 38 4 7 Checking and Replacing Mammo ST Sensors SA4 8 12 16 MC 40 4 8 Checking Replacing and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids S...

Page 56: ...8 Replacing Before Side Positioning Conveyor Rubber Rollers MC 99 6 9 Checking and Replacing Shock Absorber Attached Guide of Before Side Positioning Conveyor MC 100 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scann...

Page 57: ...de Grip Release HP Sensor SZ2 MC 186 10 7 Checking and Replacing Driven Side Grip Release HP Sensor SZ3 MC 187 10 8 Checking and Replacing Subscanning Motor MZ1 MC 188 10 9 Replacing Driving Shaft Gri...

Page 58: ...mal Switches TSW1 TSW2 MC 232 12 10 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan FANF1 MC 234 12 11 Replacing Erasure Cooling Fan Air Filter MC 235 12 12 Checking Replacing and Adjusting Erasure Unit IP Conveyance T...

Page 59: ...gement Diagram MC 272 16 2 MTH08A Board MC 273 16 3 CPU90E Board MC 274 16 4 IMG07B Board MC 276 16 5 IMG08A Board MC 277 16 6 IMG08B Board MC 278 16 7 IMG08C Board MC 279 16 8 DMC08A Board MC 280 16...

Page 60: ...ing Normal Operation MU 14 5 2 Menu Hierarchy of M Utility in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Error MU 22 6 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY Error Log Utility MU 24 6 1 1 LIST Displaying Error Log MU 24 6 2...

Page 61: ...Stop Rotation MU 78 10 3 3 LASER Laser ON OFF MU 78 10 4 4 HV HV ON OFF MU 79 10 5 5 HV DATA High Voltage Setting MU 79 10 6 6 FORMAT Setting Read Start Position and Read Width MU 80 10 7 7 SHADING S...

Page 62: ...Reading Various Data MU 116 12 5 5 EDR DATA Saving EDR Calculation to FD MU 121 12 6 6 PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE Reverting Back to Previous Version of System Software MU 123 12 7 7 EXECUTION Loading an...

Page 63: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Machine Description MD...

Page 64: ...D 1 Control Sheet Revision number Reason Pages affected Issue date 05 31 99 04 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages FM2460 04 20 2001 05 Corrections FM3006 MD 12 14 34 36 53 61 102 124...

Page 65: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MD 2 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 2 2 CONTENTS 3 4 5 6 7 9 1 8 10 1 Overall Configuration and Nomenclature of Machine 1 1 External View of Machine FRONT FRONT FR1H1221 EPS...

Page 66: ...ioning conveyor D Subscanning unit Z Scanning optics unit Power supply unit Controller FR1H1222 EPS FRONT IP removal unit B Vertical conveyor B UP down IP removal unit B Light collecting guide assembl...

Page 67: ...provided in the IP conveyance path and conveyance paths other than for reading and erasure are shared High output LD for enhanced image quality Because a high output LD is used to achieve enhanced im...

Page 68: ...t interface for an ID network In addition a high speed image network interface option for an image network may be installed Hardware Specs IEEE802 3 10Base TX IEEE802 3u 10Base TX auto sensing switchi...

Page 69: ...arts When servicing the CR IR341 for the first time check the mechanisms of such new parts and their locations 3 1 E ringless Housing Employed The employed housing bearing incorporated permits fasteni...

Page 70: ...two latches extended outward For installation slowly insert the pinion gear into the shaft until the protruding portions of the latches snap into the notches of the shaft NOTE When putting the pinion...

Page 71: ...9 1 8 10 CONTENTS 3 3 Simple Bearing Employed As a bearing for a shaft onto which relatively less load is applied a plastic bearing that is easy to install and remove is employed FR1H1224 EPS Bearing...

Page 72: ...e side positioning conveyor Loosen screw Loosen screw 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment For a timing belt that needs to be replaced during removal of a unit a tensioner that permits the t...

Page 73: ...es with your fingers The tensioner is pulled by the spring force to the state where the tension of the timing belt is adjusted 3 Secure the tensioner in place by tightening the screw FR1H1225 EPS FRON...

Page 74: ...splacement of its mounting position is less likely as compared to a screwed down type of sensor As a result inconvenience associated with its positioning is mitigated It may be somewhat difficult to s...

Page 75: ...D driver Start point detection Leading edge detection POL driver CPU board CPU90E LED08A LED08B 4 Sensor board SNS08A Power Supply JPS1 Erasure driver 24V Serial line power supply Unlit lamp sensor si...

Page 76: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MD 13 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 77: ...14 SA16 SA4 SA3 SA7 SA11 SA15 SZ2 SZ1 SZ3 SD3 MD2 MD1 SF3 MD3 MZ3 MZ2 SE1 ME1 ME2 MZ1 SF1 SF2 SF4 MF1 SA13 SA9 SA5 SOLF1 SA1 SA17 SOLA1 SOLA2 SOLA3 SOLA4 NOTE The I O symbol has the following meaning...

Page 78: ...dby IP sensor Changeover IP sensor Load standby IP sensor Overrun IP sensor Safety thermostat Safety thermostat Unlit lamp sensor PS IP conveyance sensor IP conveyance sensor IP conveyance sensor IP c...

Page 79: ...Reflective sensor FR1H1491 EPS OFF 0 OPEN ON 1 CLOSE Microswitch SA2 6 10 14 FR1H1492 EPS ON 1 CLOSE OFF 0 OPEN Microswitch SA4 8 12 16 FR1H1493 EPS OFF 0 OPEN ON 1 CLOSE 5 2 3 Sensor Monitoring Scre...

Page 80: ...2 MD 3 Side positioning motor Grip release motor IP transport motor Pulse motor Pulse motor Pulse motor Drives the side positioning mechanism Roller grip release Conveys the IP After reading conveyor...

Page 81: ...500ms MB1 PB1 SVB1 MB2 MB3 SA17 MC1 SA6 SA7 SA8 SA9 SA10 SA11 SA12 SA13 SA14 SA15 SA16 SA5 SA4 SA3 SA2 SA1 SOLA4 SOLA2 SOLA1 SOLC1 SOLF1 SOLA3 ME1 ME2 FFM MZ1 SD2 SD1 SB1 SB2 SB4 SB3 SC2 SC1 SD3 SB5 S...

Page 82: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MD 19 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 19 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 83: ...ensor and implemented during initialization When the elevation operation is permitted MB3 is driven and SA17 sensor detection is implemented OPEN CLOSE then SB sensor detection is implemented OPEN CLO...

Page 84: ...the IP MB1 that drives the suction cup moves from the home position toward the cassette cover by 83 mm 250 pulses When the suction cup arrives at the IP suction position it also activates the suction...

Page 85: ...t it has been conveyed normally IP Load Suction In order to insert into the cassette the IP conveyed from the erasure conveyor to the eleva tion unit the suction cup is moved from the suction cup home...

Page 86: ...ak Because the movement speed of the suction cup is the same as the rotation speed of the feed roller the trailing edge of the IP is inserted into the cassette FR1H0210 EPS Unit mm Cassette inner fram...

Page 87: ...P feed and mammo ST cassette sensor status If the passage time through SC1 is 2 9 sec or longer it is judged as an IP jam 14 x 17 430 x 354 0 83 2 9 CLOSE OPEN 14 x 14 354 x 354 0 7 0 83 CLOSE OPEN 10...

Page 88: ...ath changed and conveyed returned to the up down IP removal unit After detection by the cassette inlet IP sensor SB2 CLOSE OPEN the SOLC1 energized is deenergized so that the conveyance path is change...

Page 89: ...lses from the home position and move up the side positioning top stopper For IP sizes other than 14 x 17 or 14 x 14 reverse conveyance of the IP is not performed instead after reading by the barcode r...

Page 90: ...he IP is brought into contact with the IP stopper by the conveyance force By releasing the grip roller before the IP is brought into contact with the IP stopper skewing of the IP and so forth is preve...

Page 91: ...tension is applied by a spring to the two latches they are brought down when loaded so that the IP is pressed with a fixed pressure This operation is executed twice thereby determining an accurate ho...

Page 92: ...order to initiate gripping of the driven shaft roller MZ3 is activated to cause the driven shaft roller to move down descend thereby gripping the IP The descend position is detected as the sensor SZ3...

Page 93: ...s detected as the sensor SZ2 becomes OPEN from the CLOSE status FFM MZ1 Driving The driving shaft driven by FFM MZ1 transfers its drive to the driven shaft through the steel belt By use of the steel b...

Page 94: ...10 1 8 CONTENTS 7 6 After Reading Conveyor After Reading Grip The grip operation is terminated as the sensor SE1 becomes CLOSE from the OPEN status so that the IP is conveyed by ME2 to the erasure co...

Page 95: ...nveyance stops after the IP passes SF2 CLOSE OPEN and IP overrun conveyance beyond specified value is monitored by SF4 overrun IP sensor IP Path Changeover For IP path changeover after the IP passes S...

Page 96: ...is erased by the erasure lamps Five erasure lamps are used to erase the image data of the IP In order to maintain a re quired level of light intensity for the erasure lamps the turn on of the erasure...

Page 97: ...RT reduction IMG07B MODEM Touch panel Display CRT Bar Code Reader SHD correction PMT LD driver Start point detection Leading edge detection POL driver CPU board CPU90E LED08A LED08B 4 Sensor board SNS...

Page 98: ...the completion of the reading the data is temporarily saved to the HDD and one frame is freed for the next image acquisition 3 After the write to the HDD is completed the shared memory is used for a p...

Page 99: ...5 As with step 3 above the data for network output is loaded from the HDD into the shared memory 6 If rotation is required the loopback path of BUSCON is used to implement rotation The result of proc...

Page 100: ...date and time are backed up by a battery lithium ion cell A PD72070 floppy disk controller FDC is used to control the floppy disk drive FDD The 128KB SRAM contains gamma correction values In addition...

Page 101: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 38 MD 38 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS CPU90E Block Diagram FR1H0232 EPS...

Page 102: ...6 MB of main memory two 8 MB SIMMs is installed Its LAN controller supports IEEE 802 3 compliant 100BASE TX 10BASE T and auto negoti ates the speed for automatic switching as such only one RJ 45 conne...

Page 103: ...the LP For image processing it contains a 128K word 24 bit SRAM and a 1M word 16 bit DRAM IMG08A Block Diagram FR1H0234 EPS Image processing board Input Output External External External External Addr...

Page 104: ...HDD for output to the E I F at high or standard resolution High resolution or standard resolution is judged in an image transfer reservation response from the output destination This information is s...

Page 105: ...s normalization Sk Gp conversion and pixel density conversion processing and compression decompression processing JPEG compliant compression with compression ratios of 1 2 1 5 1 10 and 1 20 is sup por...

Page 106: ...rs SNS08A Block Diagram FR1H0237 EPS Address data bus AS signal ALE signal Address MPX signal OS signal R W signal DTACK signal INT signal From keyboard Magnetic card reader From touch panel To LED08A...

Page 107: ...n excitation signal Power down signal Drive signal Drive signal Drive signal 5 VDC generation circuit Pulse motor driver STK672 050 Sanyo x10 circuits Power down control circuit Breakdown protection c...

Page 108: ...r and back ON again The details of the outputs are described below CN4 5V 5 Fixed 0 1A 0 1A 0 1A LED08A TB2 5V 5 10 2 0A 37A 37A MTH08A DCOUT1 12V 5 10 1 0A 9 5A 9 5A MTH08A DCOUT2 5V 5 Fixed 0 5A 3 0...

Page 109: ...SCN08A board FR1H0239 EPS Machine power supply Image signal HV noise error HV status signal Erasure level signal HV control signal Quasi read control signal Start point detection signal Leading edge d...

Page 110: ...rted after RESTORE NOTE 1 FR1H1754 EPS 5 7 2 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 7 SHADING SENSITIVITY and 2 CALCULA TION in sequence 5 8 1 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 8 DATA MANAGEMENT and 1 SAVE SHAD ING AND POLY...

Page 111: ...8A board log amp board and after shading correction and filtering it is analog to digital A D converted for output to the IMG08A board image processing board as digital image data Image signal acquisi...

Page 112: ...ssing Analog image data sent from the PMT08A board log amp board is corrected for shading Shading correction compensates for differences in beam collecting efficiency of the light collecting scanning...

Page 113: ...ard and inputted into the SCN08A board where a maximum value within one screen is detected Because this signal is nonlin ear it is eventually converted to a dose by software based table correction The...

Page 114: ...reported to the CPU so that when HV is OFF a dialog indicative of the HV OFF status is displayed on the monitor The HV control signal is routed from the SCN08A to the PMT08 board This signal is output...

Page 115: ...results obtained at steps 1 through 3 above are abnormal the probable cause is the SCN board extraneous noise of SCN or image board s that are subsequent to the SCN board Polygon control After power O...

Page 116: ...y to check the start point sensor board POLLOCK polygon lock LED When this LED is ON the polygonal mirror is rotating at a constant speed If it is OFF or blinking it is necessary to check the polygona...

Page 117: ...ning optics unit irradiate red colored laser beams of 60 mW max 660 nm onto a six faceted polygonal mirror For the laser beam scanned by the polygonal mirror in the main scan direction its scan start...

Page 118: ...latent image due to laser beam irradiated onto the latent image on the IP surface is collected by the light collecting mirror and the excited light 660 nm laser light is cut off by the filter mounted...

Page 119: ...flow is described below Start of sequence User operation Normal processing Decision block Subroutine name Occurrence of error End of sequence PB11 Control parameter for pulse motor Number serial numbe...

Page 120: ...ng the conveyance IP length measurement is performed After the IP length measurement the erasure lamp turn on process is performed Fig 2 1 1 Machine Operation during Single IP Conveyance Side position...

Page 121: ...criptions of mechanical control A Cassette feeder B Up down IP removal unit C Before side positioning conveyor D Side positioning conveyor Z Subscanning unit E After reading conveyor F Erasure conveyo...

Page 122: ...e retry Cassette hold DRIVE SOLA1 OFF Cassette setting Fig 2 2 2 Fig 2 11 1 Message display Reload cassette Cassette ejection Preprocessing Fig 2 1 1 Fig 2 2 1 Cassette IN 1 2 In response to the seque...

Page 123: ...t for hold retry Hold retry TR1H0010 EPS SA1 SA2 SA3 SOLA1 LEDT1 SA1 SA2 SA4 SOLA1 LDET1 SA5 SA6 SA7 SOLA2 LDET3 SA9 SA10 SA11 SOLA3 LDET5 SA13 SA14 SA15 SOLA4 LDET7 I O name I O name in flow Topmost...

Page 124: ...ss HOLD RELEASE key Cassette hold release Operation stopped Level 2 error Cassette hold failure retry Push the cassette once to draw it out The cassette cannot be drawn out by merely pulling it Fig 2...

Page 125: ...t is initiated when the following condition is met Movement of the elevation unit permitted Fig 2 7 1 The sequence is not initiated until the movement load of the elevation unit is performed to load t...

Page 126: ...uction cup HP detection 2 phase 1 pulse driving for driver initialization With deceleration time setting and LIMIT stop it is fed by a specified amount after sensor edge detection Fig 2 3 2 Suction Cu...

Page 127: ...med and after SB is OPEN the suction cups are fed by a specified amount and stop 3 Suction cup HP detection Sensor edge detection The positioning operation is performed by 1 pulse driving and the sens...

Page 128: ...movement UP DRIVE MB3 PB101 Level 0 error Elevation HP movement error MB3 phase start point forced return 2 phase Level 2 error Suction cup HP return error Elevation unit movement stop DRIVE MB3 OFF S...

Page 129: ...o edge DRIVE MB3 PB103 Fig 2 3 3 Elevation Unit HP Positioning 2 2 HP positioning preparation operation Sensor SB3 is engaged with the actuator for topmost shelf detection Operation for elevation edge...

Page 130: ...conveyance path clearing is confirmed START END Y N FR1H0315 EPS Feed suction Feed suction gripping Feed gripping and conveying Fig 2 4 4 Fig 2 4 3 Fig 2 4 3 Is IP feed permitted Preprocessing Fig 2 1...

Page 131: ...ndition DRIVE SVB1 OFF Fig 6 1 1 Fig 2 3 2 Preprocessing Fig 2 4 1 It is confirmed that the suction cups suck the IP securely OPEN IP suction not completed CLOSE IP suction completed Fig 2 4 2 Feed Su...

Page 132: ...P positioning Fig 2 3 2 Suction cup HP positioning Preprocessing Fig 2 4 1 Fig 2 4 3 Feed Suction Conveyance Remedial sequence when the IP is dropped The grip rollers rotate at the rate of suction cup...

Page 133: ...g Cassette ejection 2 Level 1 error IP grip failure Conveyance stop DRIVE MB 2 OFF Soft Fig 6 2 1 Fig 2 3 2 Suction cup HP positioning Preprocessing Fig 2 4 1 Fig 2 4 4 Feed Conveyance The leading edg...

Page 134: ...n the following requirement is met the sequence starts IP feed conveyance permission OK Fig 2 9 1 Data for determination of IP type is obtained To the conveyance path of the up down IP removal unit th...

Page 135: ...IVE MD3 OFF Hard DRIVE MD1 OFF Soft DRIVE MD2 OFF Soft Start of passage time count End of passage time count Level 0 error Conveyance error Conveyance stop DRIVE MD3 OFF Hard DRIVE MD1 OFF Soft DRIVE...

Page 136: ...cification IP determination As per Table 2 5 3 IP Determination Criteria Preprocessing Fig 2 5 1 Fig 2 5 3 IP Determination CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE CLOSE OPEN OPEN OPEN CLOSE OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN OPEN C...

Page 137: ...of the reading sequence For more detail see 2 7 3 and 2 7 5 START END Y N Does the machine comply with IDT connection type FR1H0331 EPS Side positioning Fig 2 6 4 Fig 2 6 3 Fig 2 6 2 CSL IDT informat...

Page 138: ...D33 start Fig 2 6 4 Fig 6 10 1 Fig 2 6 3 Side positioning conveyance Side positioning Wait for PD32 completion Level 1 error IP with improper generation type detected Error handling BCR retry BCR read...

Page 139: ...IVE MD3 OFF Soft MD3 excitation OFF Preprocessing Fig 2 6 1 Fig 2 6 2 Fig 3 2 1 and Fig 5 6 1 Fig 2 6 3 Side Positioning Conveyance The IP stopper located at the edge of the unit is turned ON UP condi...

Page 140: ...g 2 6 4 Side Positioning The side positioning operation is performed twice in order to increase positional accuracy The second side positioning movement is so small that it is difficult to visually ch...

Page 141: ...eturn DRIVE MD1 PD51 DELAY TD51 Side positioning driving stop DRIVE MD1 OFF Soft Side positioning driving positioning DRIVE MD1 PD53 Level 2 error Side positioning HP detection preparation retry Side...

Page 142: ...52 PD53 PD54 TD51 TD52 TD53 TD54 ND51 Table 2 6 5 Operation Parameters Symbol Description Value TR1H0029 EPS SD1 MD1 Belt Guide plate Side positioning mechanism view seen from above FRONT FR1H0343 EPS...

Page 143: ...N 13AE 13AC 13AF END FR1H0344 EPS Does the IDT respond within TD33 Level 1 error IDT line error Wait for CSL input ID information OK IDT No MPM code available Level 1 error No MPM code available Level...

Page 144: ...N 13A8 END END END END END END END END ST ST HR ST ST HR HR Is the IP size 8x10 ST Is the IP size 24x30 HR Is the IP size 18x24 HR Is the IP size 18x24 ST FR1H0345 EPS HR BC information BC information...

Page 145: ...ning unit START END FR1H0346 EPS Fig 2 7 3 Fig 2 7 2 Reading preparation Reading Fig 2 3 1 Movement of elevation unit feed permitted CSL IDT information check 2 Fig 2 7 7 Preprocessing Fig 2 1 1 Fig 2...

Page 146: ...itioning conveyance grip release Both of the releases should be completed Table 2 7 2 Operation Parameters Conveyance grip release Conveyance preparation for reading Driven shaft grip timeout 256 p 18...

Page 147: ...g IP leading edge detection error W F monitoring Fig 2 7 3 3 3 Timer STOP Error log detailed information Timer data recording Level 2 error Driven shaft grip release operation error Level 0 error Driv...

Page 148: ...for subscanning stop Driving shaft grip timeout ST HR Lower limit for driving shaft grip spec ST HR Upper limit for driving shaft grip spec ST HR Driving shaft grip release timeout fast HR Driven shaf...

Page 149: ...ng conveyor side MZ3 MZ2 IP After reading conveyor side SZ3 Sensor arm for SZ3 SZ2 Sensor arm for SZ2 IP conveyance during reading FR1H0354 EPS SZ3 SZ2 MZ2 Grip solid line SZ2 OPEN Grip release dotted...

Page 150: ...61 DELAY TD61 Grip driving stop DRIVE ME1 OFF soft Grip driving positioning DRIVE ME1 PD63 Grip driving stop DRIVE ME1 OFF soft ME1 excitation stability point reset 2 phase Level 2 error After reading...

Page 151: ...e driving HP movement 1 DRIVE ME1 PD63 Fig 2 7 4 After Reading Conveyance Grip HP Positioning 2 2 2w 1 2 phase Grip HP detection Cam After reading conveyance grip mechanism FR1H0359 EPS Table 2 7 4 Op...

Page 152: ...RIVE MD2 PD61 Grip driving stop DRIVE MD2 OFF soft Grip driving positioning DRIVE MD2 PD63 Grip driving stop DRIVE MD2 OFF soft MD2 excitation stability point reset 2 phase Level 2 error Side position...

Page 153: ...D63 Fig 2 7 5 Side Positioning Conveyance Grip HP Positioning 2 2 Grip HP detection 2w 1 2 phase Side positioning mechanism Side positioning top stopper SD3 Cam Side positioning conveyance grip mechan...

Page 154: ...IVE MF1 OFF soft MF1 ME2 excitation OFF After reading conveyance stop DRIVE ME2 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft MF1 ME2 excitation OFF Preprocessing Fig 2 7 1 and Fig 3 3 1 Fig 2 7 6 After Reading Conveya...

Page 155: ...eck performed at the end of BCR reading and side positioning If the ID information is obtained normally the process continues START END Y N FR1H0365 EPS Wait for ID information registration from IDT W...

Page 156: ...d The suction cup HP is confirmed MB3 moves the elevation unit to a designed shelf For its parameters see Table 2 8 1a It is confirmed that the elevation unit is in a proper shelf position Retry at th...

Page 157: ...only one IP left in the machine FR1H0367 EPS Fig 2 9 3 Fig 2 9 2 Before erasure conveyance Erasure conveyance Erasure lamp turn off and preheating DRIVE LAMP1 5 preheating Two IPs One IP After readin...

Page 158: ...1H0371 EPS Table 2 9 2 Operation Parameters Conveyance before erasure conveyance Wait for switchback Before erasure conveyance IP leading edge detection timeout 1 044 p 0 2 sec 2 sec PF12 TF13 TF14 Sy...

Page 159: ...ed erasure conveyance DRIVE MF1 PF14 MF1 excitation stability point reset 2 phase Erasure conveyance DRIVE MF1 PF13 Erasure conveyance stop DRIVE MF1 OFF soft Erasure conveyance stop DRIVE MF1 OFF sof...

Page 160: ...e conveyance stop DRIVE MF1 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MB2 OFF soft DRIVE SOLC1 OFF DRIVE SOLF OFF MF1 MC1 MB2 excitation OFF Level 0 error Convergence path changeover guide operation error Aft...

Page 161: ...H0375 EPS Load suction conveyance Fig 2 10 4 Fig 2 10 3 Fig 2 10 2 Fig 2 9 4 After reading conveyance permission OK Erasure check Fig 2 10 5 Load conveyance Load suction After erasure conveyance Prepr...

Page 162: ...LF1 OFF soft MF1 MC1 MB2 excitation OFF Load conveyance stop DRIVE MF1 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MB2 OFF hard DRIVE SOLC1 OFF soft DRIVE SOLF1 OFF soft Preprocessing Fig 2 10 1 Fig 2 10 2 Load...

Page 163: ...VE MB1 PB15 Suction cup movement HP load standby DRIVE MB1 PB14 Leak valve close DRIVE SVB1 OFF Suction pump ON DRIVE PB1 ON Leak valve suction condition DRIVE SVB1 OFF Fig 6 2 1 Suction cup HP positi...

Page 164: ...stop DRIVE MB2 OFF soft Roller rotation at the equal speed of the arm DRIVE MB2 PB25 Suction movement load leak HP DRIVE MB1 PB17 Leak valve suction condition DRIVE SVB1 OFF Level 2 error Suction cup...

Page 165: ...d if erasure failed its remedial action is taken START END Y N Y N 13AA 13AB FR1H0385 EPS Error handling Overexposed IP Fig 6 4 1 Is the erasure lamp lit Error handling Erasure lamp Level 1 error Eras...

Page 166: ...sette Ejection The cassette removable condition is indicated Operation performed by the operator Instant return of cassette is supported The ready condition is indicated SOLA1 OFFON OFF CLOSE ON OPEN...

Page 167: ...itioning secondary erasure Reading secondary erasure Erasure Movement of elevation unit load IP load Cassette ejection Fig 3 1 1 Machine Operation during Secondary Erasure See 2 2 See 2 3 See 2 4 See...

Page 168: ...ad during the IP conveyance Same as in the routine For 14 x17 and 14 x14 reverse conveyance is performed before side positioning to position the leading edge of the IP Same as in the routine The start...

Page 169: ...iving shaft grip error Driving shaft grip driving DRIVE MZ2 ON TZ21 START Timer START Driving shaft grip release stop DRIVE MZ2 OFF hard Timer STOP Level 0 error Driven shaft grip error Driven shaft g...

Page 170: ...MD3 OFF soft DRIVE ME2 OFF soft DELAY TZ17 DELAY TZ18 IP feed permission Conveyance grip release HP return DRIVE MD2 PD23 Driving shaft grip release driving DRIVE MZ2 ON Level 0 error Driving shaft gr...

Page 171: ...31 99 FM2460 MD 108 MD 108 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS 3 4 Erasure Conveyance The sequence is the same as in the routine single IP conveyance except that the convey ance speed is different Note how...

Page 172: ...e positioning step operation See Section 4 3 4 2 Feed Load Step Operation 1 Overall General Sequence This operation is to check the IP handling at the cassette set unit and IP removal unit At each ste...

Page 173: ...l 1 error Feed IP suction failure IP leak DRIVE PB1 OFF DRIVE SVB1 ON Level 2 error Feed IP suction failure retry Leak valve suction condition DRIVE SVB1 OFF Leak valve suction condition DRIVE SVB1 OF...

Page 174: ...condition DRIVE SVB1 OFF Fig 6 2 1 DELAY TB17 Fig 2 3 2 Suction cup HP positioning Suction cup HP positioning DELAY TB17 Suction cup movement HP feed leak DRIVE MB1 PB19 Fig 2 3 2 Fig 4 2 2 Feed Step...

Page 175: ...Operation 3 3 The leading edge of the IP fed by the grip rollers is detected The leading edge of the IP shields SB2 These steps correspond to Feed Conveyance described in Fig 2 4 4 Table 4 2 2 Operati...

Page 176: ...suction not completed CLOSE IP suction completed The suction cups move from the home position to the load standby position These steps correspond to Load Suction described in Fig 2 10 3 Load IP suctio...

Page 177: ...ak valve suction condition DRIVE SVB1 OFF Level 2 error Suction cup HP return failure Fig 6 2 1 DELAY TB17 Fig 2 3 2 Suction cup HP positioning Fig 2 3 2 Suction cup HP positioning Suction leak DRIVE...

Page 178: ...TB16 TB17 Suction cup movement feed suction feed leak Suction cup movement HP load standby Suction cup movement load standby load suction Suction cup movement load leak HP Conveyance load suction sync...

Page 179: ...DRIVE MD1 PD11 DELAY TD12 Side positioning HP positioning Fig 2 6 5 Side positioning back side positioning 2 DRIVE MD1 PD14 DELAY TD14 Fig 4 3 1 Side Positioning Step Operation Side positioning stopp...

Page 180: ...t four minutes to boot up and every time it automatically searches for any remaining IP left in the machine and ejects it It is not until the remaining IP is ejected or it is checked to see that there...

Page 181: ...ejection Cassette hold release operation Subscanning grip HP positioning See Routine during single IP conveyance in Fig 2 6 5 See Routine during single IP conveyance in Fig 2 7 5 See Routine during s...

Page 182: ...E MZ2 ON TZ21 START Driving shaft grip release stop DRIVE MZ2 OFF hard Level 0 error Driven shaft grip error Driven shaft grip stop DRIVE MZ3 OFF hard Driven shaft grip stop DRIVE MZ3 OFF soft Preproc...

Page 183: ...SF1 SF2 SF3 CLOSE SB2 CLOSE SC1 OPEN SF1 SF2 SF3 CLOSE SB2 CLOSE SC1 OPEN SF1 SF2 SF3 CLOSE SB2 SC1 SF1 SF2 SF3 OPEN NOTE SB2 OPEN SC1 CLOSE Fig 5 3 5 Fig 5 3 5 Fig 5 3 4 Fig 5 3 6 Fig 5 3 3 Fig 5 3 7...

Page 184: ...ning of load standby IP Search for load conveyance remaining IP After reading standby IP found No IP Priority 3 SF2 CLOSE SF2 CLOSE Priority 2 SF1 CLOSE SF3 OPEN Special SF1 SF3 CLOSE Status of each s...

Page 185: ...ent of before reading conveyance remaining IP Search for after reading conveyance remaining IP After reading standby IP found No IP No IP SC1 SD3 OPEN SC1 remains OPEN Status of each sensor Is there a...

Page 186: ...MB1 PB82 Level 2 error Suction cup HP return error Fig 2 3 2 Suction cup HP positioning Suction leak DRIVE SVB1 ON Suction pump OFF DRIVE P1 OFF Leak released DRIVE SB1 OFF IP found before search Prep...

Page 187: ...RIVE MB2 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft Movement of feed conveyance remaining IP DELAY TF13 DELAY TF13 DELAY TF13 When SB2 is opened Feed conveyance DOWN direction stop DRIVE MB2 OFF s...

Page 188: ...veyance Remaining IP START END Y N Is SB2 closed within TB71 FR1H0409 EPS Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE MD2 PD72 DRIVE MC1 PC72 Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE MB2 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF...

Page 189: ...MC1 PC72 DRIVE MF1 PF72 Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE SOLC1 OFF soft DRIVE MB2 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE SOLC1 OFF soft DRIVE MB2...

Page 190: ...conveyance direction stop DRIVE SOLF1 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft DRIVE SOLC1 OFF soft Positioning of load standby IP Erasure conveyance direction stop DRIVE SOLF1 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft DRIVE SO...

Page 191: ...ing of load standby IP After reading conveyance direction stop DRIVE ME2 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft Preprocessing Fig 5 3 1 The actuation of the sensors during normal operation are as follows SF2 OPE...

Page 192: ...g 5 3 1 The actuation of the sensors during normal operation are as follows SF2 OPEN CLOSE OPEN SF4 OPEN CLOSE CLOSE Monitoring of SF4 is implemented in case SF2 becomes faulty Fig 5 3 10 Movement of...

Page 193: ...nce direction stop DRIVE MF1 OFF soft Erasure conveyance direction stop DRIVE MF1 OFF soft After reading conveyance direction stop DRIVE MF1 OFF soft After reading conveyance direction stop DRIVE MF1...

Page 194: ...Before reading standby IP found DELAY TD74 Level 0 error Side positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection error Side positioning conveyance direction DRIVE MD31 PD71 Side positioning conveyance dire...

Page 195: ...START END Y N Y N Y N 03B7 DELAY TD74 FR1H0417 EPS Is SC1 closed within TD73 Is SD3 closed within TD75 Is SD3 closed Side positioning conveyance reverse direction DRIVE MD3 PD72 Side positioning conve...

Page 196: ...positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection error Level 0 error Side positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection error Side positioning conveyance direction DRIVE MD31 PD71 Side positioning conveyan...

Page 197: ...IVE ME2 PE73 After reading standby IP found No IP Preprocessing Fig 5 3 1 Fig 5 3 15 Search for After Reading Conveyance Remaining IP Reading conveyance direction stop DRIVE MZ1 OFF soft DRIVE ME2 OFF...

Page 198: ...DRIVE MF1 PF74 Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE ME1 PB74 DRIVE MC1 PC74 Load suction conveyance Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE ME2 OFF hard DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft Level 0 error F...

Page 199: ...e cassette located in the shelf of interest Remaining IP before search during search Remaining IP after search FR1H0421 EPS User selected process continued Fig 5 4 3 Remaining ejected cassette IN Leve...

Page 200: ...error READY state indicator LED1 or shelf of interest is turned on Levl 2 error Cassette hold failure retry Cassette hold DRIVE SOLA1 OFF Status of SA2 for shelf of interest is checked Fig 2 2 2 Fig 2...

Page 201: ...t NA11 FR1H0423 EPS Level 1 error Cassette shelf error Cassette hold release DRIVER SOLA1 ON Cassette hold DRIVER SOLA1 OFF Level 0 error Degeneration for all shelves Degeneration for all shelves DELA...

Page 202: ...S Level 2 error Cassette hold release failure retry Fig 5 5 1 Cassette Hold Release Operation Check 2 2 Processing for cassette hold release failure Retry at the time of cassette hold failure Cassette...

Page 203: ...d conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE MB2 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MD3 OFF soft Level 0 error Feed load conveyance remaining ejection error Feed conveyance UP direction stop DRIVE MB2 OFF soft...

Page 204: ...n be inserted LED remains OFF Cassette ejection Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE ME2 OFF hard DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MD3 OFF soft Feed conveyance UP direction DRIVE ME2 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft...

Page 205: ...located in the shelf of interest FR1H0427 EPS User selected process continued No IP Fig 5 4 3 Remaining ejected cassette IN Cassette ejection Level 1 error IP position information error System down I...

Page 206: ...oad conveyance direction DRIVE ME2 OFF soft DRIVE MC1 OFF soft DRIVE MF1 OFF soft DRIVE SOLC1 OFF soft Level 0 error Load standby remaining IP ejection error Load conveyance direction DRIVE ME2 OFF so...

Page 207: ...s there any remaining IP Fig 2 11 1 Cassette ejection Fig 5 6 2 Fig 2 8 1 Fig 2 1 1 IP search and comparison Up down load movement Steps after reading conveyance to IP load in reading sequence of rout...

Page 208: ...Driven shaft self diagnostics DELAY TZ51 Driving shaft self diagnostics DELAY TZ51 Driving shaft grip release fast DELAY TZ51 Fig 5 9 6 Fig 5 9 5 Fig 5 9 4 Fig 5 9 5 Fig 5 9 4 Fig 5 9 2 Fig 5 9 3 Fig...

Page 209: ...rror Driving shaft grip stop DRIVE MZ2 OFF soft Level 0 error Driving shaft grip error Driving shaft grip driving DRIVE MZ2 ON TZ21 START Timer START Driving shaft grip release stop DRIVE MZ2 OFF hard...

Page 210: ...END Y N 03C9 Is SZ3 closed within TZ34 FR1H0434 EPS Level 0 error Driven shaft grip error Driven shaft grip driving DRIVE MZ3 ON Driven shaft grip stop DRIVE MZ3 OFF hard Driven shaft grip stop DRIVE...

Page 211: ...ta setting Timer STOP Speed data setting Speed data update Rotation speed correction Sequence flow chart See 5 9 8 DELAY TZ51 Preprocessing Fig 5 9 1 Fig 5 9 6 Driven Shaft Self Diagnostics The previo...

Page 212: ...lease driving DRIVE MZ2 ST speed ON TZ25 STRAT Timer START Speed data setting Timer STOP Speed data setting DELAY TZ51 Speed data update Preprocessing Fig 5 9 1 Fig 5 9 7 Driving Shaft Self Diagnostic...

Page 213: ...for the correction D A data In other cases Use the correction D A data as is Preprocessing Fig 5 9 6 Fig 5 9 7 Fig 5 9 8 Rotation Speed Correction Sequence Flow Chart T1 Processing time acquired by m...

Page 214: ...ocessing Fig 5 1 1 Fig 5 10 1 Empty Cassette Ejection The cassette removable condition is indicated Operation performed by the operator Instant return of cassette is supported Same as in the cassette...

Page 215: ...failure retry Preprocessing Fig 5 1 1 Processing for cassette hold release failure If the shelf intended for ejection is degenerated due to initialization another empty cassette is put into another s...

Page 216: ...in Fig 2 11 1 If hold release error occurs during cassette ejection degeneration takes place for the relevant shelf At the time when the error IP is returned to the cassette an elevation permission is...

Page 217: ...by the operator Instant return of cassette is supported The ready condition is indicated Return to normal routine Cassette ejection 2 If hold release failure occurs during cassette ejection 2 the sys...

Page 218: ...essing Fig 6 2 1 Fig 6 2 2 Cassette Hold Release 2 Cassette hold release is checked Retry at the time of cassette hold release failure Processing for cassette hold release failure System down Table 6...

Page 219: ...e described in Fig 2 11 1 If hold release error occurs during cassette ejection degeneration takes place for the relevant shelf At the time when the error IP is returned to the cassette an elevation p...

Page 220: ...conveyance stop DRIVE MD3 PD81 DRIVE MC2 PC12 DRIVE MB2 PB23 Level 0 error Conveyance error recovered IP load slow Fig 2 10 4 Fig 2 10 3 Load suction Load suction conveyance Conveyance grip HP return...

Page 221: ...Subsequently degeneration is performed for the lamp and the IP is left unerased Preprocessing Fig 2 10 5 At the time when the error IP is returned to the cassette an elevation permission is issued via...

Page 222: ...quence Corresponding sequence Fig 2 6 2 BCR START END FR1H0447 EPS Error message output Stop ARARM UNLOAD CASS Alarm disabled Cassette removed Preprocessing Fig 2 6 2 Fig 6 6 1 Error Handling Detectio...

Page 223: ...IDT Line Error At the time when the error IP is returned to the cassette an elevation permission is issued to start the processing for the next IP in the queue At the same time removal of the cassette...

Page 224: ...it is placed in a queue until an elevation permission Another IP in the machine proceeds to the load standby condition The unprocessed cassette enters the feed standby condition This elevation permis...

Page 225: ...direction along the feed convey ance path so that the IP is returned to the cassette START END FR1H0450 EPS Process up to side positioning is performed for second IP Reverse conveyance load Fig 6 3 2...

Page 226: ...31 Conveyance grip HP return DRIVE MD2 PD23 BCR return conveyance driving DRIVE MD3 PD33 Preprocessing Fig 2 6 2 Fig 6 10 1 Error Handling BCR Retry Table 6 10 1a Operation Parameters Side positioning...

Page 227: ...sed ID information not registered IP with improper generation type detected No MPM code available IDT line error IP position information error Feed IP suction failure Feed IP dropped IP grip failure L...

Page 228: ...3 1 MD 62 Fig 2 3 3 MD 66 Fig 2 8 1 MD 93 Fig 2 4 2 MD 68 Fig 4 2 2 MD 110 Fig 2 10 3 MD 100 Fig 4 2 3 MD 113 Fig 2 3 2 MD 63 Fig 2 3 2 MD 64 Fig 2 3 1 MD 62 Fig 2 3 3 MD 65 Fig 2 4 3 MD 69 Fig 2 8 1...

Page 229: ...0 5 TB52 Suction cup HP detection preparation timeout 1 3 TB53 Suction cup HP detection timeout 5 3 TB54 Suction cup HP 1 pulse driving timeout 20 TB71 Feed load conveyance remaining IP search timeout...

Page 230: ...ioning 0 1 TD14 Wait for settlement of IP that has been side positioned 0 2 TD31 Wait for BCR return 0 5 TD32 Wait for side positioning conveyance return 0 2 TD33 IDT response timeout 120 TD34 Side po...

Page 231: ...grip HP detection timeout 13 3 TD64 Conveyance grip HP 1 pulse driving timeout 10 TD71 Side positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection timeout 1 5 6 TD72 Side positioning conveyance remaining IP eje...

Page 232: ...nce timeout 2 6 TQ22 SPR load timeout 3 7 TR11 SPR before erasure conveyance timeout 0 42 0 59 0 69 0 91 0 96 0 7 0 96 0 83 TR12 SPR erasure conveyance IP trailing edge detection timeout TR1H1156 EPS...

Page 233: ...rip release start TZ14 Wait for subscanning stop conveyance compensation for logical reading 0 Standard reading 18x43 portrait center 10x8 landscape upper right 10x12 portrait upper right 14x14 top 18...

Page 234: ...release spec self diagnostics 1 7 Self diagnostics TZ37 Upper limit for driven shaft grip release spec self diagnostics 2 0 Self diagnostics TZ40 Mirror up timeout 1 TZ41 Mirror down timeout 1 TZ51 Wa...

Page 235: ...o V type ST sub standard sensitivity Roller line speed mm sec PF13 PF14 conveyance speed pps TF15 timeout sec Remarks X ray dosage mR Greater than Less than 4 0 40 42 00 2139 14 2 6 40 25 13 1280 23 7...

Page 236: ...fferent generation Roller line speed mm sec PF13 PF14 conveyance speed pps TF15 timeout sec Remarks X ray dosage mR Greater than Less than 0 No limitation 471 20 3000 1 8 PF13 PF14 conveyance speed pp...

Page 237: ...corresponds to three digits of bits 1st digit bit 2 0 drive with high power 1 drive with low power 2nd digit bit 1 0 stop in energized condition 1 stop with unenergized condition 3rd digit bit 0 0 wi...

Page 238: ...63 0 0 PC74 0x7FFFFF 3000 070677 600 0141355 220 70 0 0 TR1H1159 EPS CW CCW CCW CW CCW CW CCW CW CCW CW CW CCW CCW CCW CCW CW CW CW CCW CCW CW CW CW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CW CCW CCW CW CW CCW CW CW CW...

Page 239: ...CCW CCW CCW CW CW CW CW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CCW CW CW CW CW CW CW CCW CW CCW CW CCW CCW HSPD pps LSPD pps UP ms DN ms Delay H L I O name Symbol Description Pulse count p common to each IP Remarks Moto...

Page 240: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 009 051 05 04 20 2001 FM3006 MD 175 2 MD 175 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 241: ...nd Side Positioning Conveyor ON OFF RES ET SW Remo te Local Rear view Side plate of side positioning conveyor Side plate of before side positioning conveyor Side plate of vertical conveyor 0 5 mm or l...

Page 242: ...1 EPS Top view Top view Front view Two plane alignment One plane alignment 105 5 0 5mm Right hand side plate of cassette set unit machine specific label side Cassette set unit tray Cassette set unit C...

Page 243: ...view Internal plate External plate Erasure conveyor Before side positioning conveyor Side plate of before side positioning conveyor Side plate of erasure conveyor Frame 188 0 3 188 0 3 FRONT FR1H1613...

Page 244: ...RONT A B C Tray Subscanning unit Top view FR1H1615 EPS A 74 1 B 74 1 C 100 1 Unit mm Shock absorbing rubber x4 Loosen two screws After Reading Conveyor After reading conveyor Side plate of after readi...

Page 245: ...conveyor D Subscanning unit Z Scanning optics unit Power supply unit Controller FR1H1046 EPS FRONT Vertical conveyor B IP removal unit B Light collecting guide assembly After reading conveyor E Erasur...

Page 246: ...9 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 181 MD 181 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS 9 3 IP Conveyance Locations ON OFF RES ET SW Remo te Local IP 3 2mm Measure between them Vertical conveyor Side plate of vertical c...

Page 247: ...is performed so that all the mecha nisms are initialized to their home position Subsequently power OFF the machine and then check the home position IP removal unit FRONT IP removal unit Up down IP re...

Page 248: ...3 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS Cassette set unit and IP removal unit SA17 Actuator Cassette set unit IP removal unit FRONT Hole SB3 Actuator Hole FR1H1607 EPS Side positioning conveyor SD1 CLOSE cond...

Page 249: ...9 10 1 8 CONTENTS Subscanning unit SZ3 OPEN condition SZ2 CLOSE condition MZ2 MZ3 Cam Cam Light blocking plate for SZ2 Light blocking plate for SZ3 FRONT Subscanning unit FR1H1608 EPS After Reading Co...

Page 250: ...SD3 37 4 31 73 40 30 9 8 24 2 54 7 39 6 92 25 40 6 52 6 BCR SF2 SF3 28 170 94 129 3 104 125 3 SC1 SC2 SB2 SF1 Cassette Guide plate Guide plate Guide plate Guide plate Guide plate Guide plate Guide pl...

Page 251: ...on Grip Springs Vertical conveyor IP removal unit Before side positioning conveyor Side positioning conveyor After reading conveyor Subscanning unit Scanning optics unit Erasure conveyor Power supply...

Page 252: ...de reference plane 388N2384 4 78 4 Left side 388N2385 91 9 D Right side reference plane 388N2384 0 5 4 78 4 Left side 388N2385 91 9 E Right side reference plane 388N2386 4 Left side 388N2387 F Right s...

Page 253: ...diately after power on reset Both of the two LEDs are lit Idle condition after DSP initialization The two LEDs are lit alternately at intervals of 0 1 sec While the DSP is implementing image processin...

Page 254: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 189 MD 189 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 255: ...CONTENTS 11 Interlock The interlock requirements for machine protection provide that the up down drive motor MB3 must not operate while the suction cup home position sensor SB1 is OPEN SB1 MB3 Up down...

Page 256: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 191 MD 191 11 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 257: ...ization you can locate a troubled subsystem by noting the displayed step number Step 99 Panel control Step 95 Log information control Step 90 Conveyance control Step 80 Read control Step 70 DMS FINP o...

Page 258: ...CR IR341 Service Manual 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MD 193 MD 193 12 11 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 259: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Troubleshooting MT...

Page 260: ...ns due to change in configuration All pages FM2460 11 20 99 05 Corrections FM2638 MT 32 34 49 51 53 56 64 70 72 04 20 2001 06 Software update FM3006 MT 3 4 6 9 11 12 22 26 28 29 29 1 29 2 30 31 33 33...

Page 261: ...s List 2 3 Format of Detail Information 2 4 Troubleshooting Flows 2 5 IP Jam Handling Procedures 2 6 Check for IP Conveyance Trouble immediately after startup 2 3 3 Locations To be First Checked When...

Page 262: ...tion etc This category includes an error that is merely logged as history information and an error where the processing is resumed but its error code is displayed on screen Y Error classification 0 OS...

Page 263: ...shared data management system An attempt is made to load a file during initialization of the shared data management system but an error occurs No file Improper file content file corrupted HD failure...

Page 264: ...hosts Description of the hosts file is improper Illegal IP address description format No host name A 1 0134 File setup value error File setup value check error hosts Description of the host file is im...

Page 265: ...line of data D 1 0303 File setup value error A file is read but an error is detected Improper data characters other than 0 9 D 1 0304 File read error A file is read but an error is detected Cannot be...

Page 266: ...eyance error During IP feed conveyance after the IP passes over SC1 SD3 cannot detect the IP D 5 03B4 Recovered IP load slow conveyance error The IP is conveyed toward the cassette set unit but SB2 re...

Page 267: ...rip error MZ2 is driven during IP reading conveyance but SZ2 does not turn OFF D 5 03C7 Driven shaft grip release error MZ3 is driven during IP reading conveyance but SZ3 does not turn OFF D 5 03C8 Dr...

Page 268: ...ce remaining IP ejection error SF2 does not turn OFF during initialization D 5 03D9 Erasure conveyance remaining IP ejection error Because SF2 is turned ON during initialization the IP is conveyed tow...

Page 269: ...faulty E 2 0412 DSP4 program boot error When a program is booted in DSP4 an error occurs Check if the IMG07B board or MTH08A board is faulty or if program DSP4M1J S24 is present in the hard disk E 2 0...

Page 270: ...Monitor image write error Write of the monitor image to the hard disk fails during read The HDD or CPU90E board or MTH08A board is faulty E 6 0462 EDR data write error Write of the standard EDR backu...

Page 271: ...replace the IP leading edge sensor SED08A E 3 0549 End of screen error No end of screen interrupt occurs during read Check and replace the SCN08A board polygonal mirror assembly light source section...

Page 272: ...ormation for the battery backup memory is improper I 3 0807 Format number acquisition error The combination of read size and format is improper Check the read size etc I 4 0809 DMA device initializati...

Page 273: ...error Write to the DSP device cannot be done Check the IMG08A board I 7 081A DSP11 memory read error Read from the DSP device cannot be done Check the IMG08A board I 7 081B DSP11 checksum error DSP ch...

Page 274: ...ck the IMG08B board I 7 0828 DSP21 memory read error Read from the DSP device cannot be done Check the IMG08B board I 7 0829 DSP21 checksum error DSP checksum error Check the IMG08B board Register the...

Page 275: ...he IMG08C board I 7 0837 DSP30 checksum error DSP checksum error Check the IMG08C board Register the DSP in the HD again I 7 0838 DSP30 self diagnostics error DSP self diagnostics error Check the IMG0...

Page 276: ...n error occurs during execution of DSP application DMC08A board failure B 0936 DSP0 image processing error 3 An attempt to cancel the DSP command fails DMC08A board failure B TR1H1231 EPS Code Name Si...

Page 277: ...faulty B 0956 DSP0 image processing error 3 An attempt to cancel the DSP command fails The DMC08A board is faulty B 0957 DMA transfer error A hardware failure occurs during DMA transfer The DMC08A boa...

Page 278: ...ormat is improper The file in the HDD is corrupted The HDD itself is faulty etc K 1 TR1H1233 EPS Code Name Significance Occurrence Condition Detail Probable Cause Remedy Refer to Detail Denotes the de...

Page 279: ...after reading the image data from the HD fails HD failure L 1 0B06 Image data write close error An attempt to close after writing the image data on the memory to the HD fails HD failure L 1 0B10 DSPH...

Page 280: ...DMA transfer error Image data transfer from the memory to the HCP board or from the HCP board to the memory fails The HCP board is faulty L 4 0B20 DMA device open error An attempt to open the DMA devi...

Page 281: ...age data read error An attempt to read the image data fails No file HD failure D 0D11 ID information read error An attempt to read the image information fails No file HD failure D 0D12 Image data clos...

Page 282: ...at data in the image area of the HD is corrupted 1113 HD image area uninitialized An error occurs with the format data in the HD image area F TR1H1237 EPS 0D61 File read error An attempt to read the f...

Page 283: ...ation not registered D 5 13AD IP with improper generation type detected D 5 13AE No relevant MPM code D 5 13AF IDT line error D 5 TR1H1238 EPS 13A4 Cassette setting error D 5 13A5 Cassette setting err...

Page 284: ...out occurs A line failure occurs A failure occurs on the IDT The SMCU driver is faulty F 1712 ID unregistration received The ID information is not yet registered Register the ID information I TR1H1239...

Page 285: ...DMS output request received when the DMS is invalid A DMS output request is received when the DMS is invalid Software failure TR1H1240 EPS Code Name Significance Occurrence Condition Detail Probable...

Page 286: ...sufficient A 2021 File open error An error occurs when the log file is opened The file in the HDD is corrupted The HDD itself is faulty A 2022 File write error An error occurs when the log file is wri...

Page 287: ...attempt to reserve an area to output the log file fails The main memory is insufficient A 204A Image file access error An error is detected during image file access so that the SCSI is reset and an i...

Page 288: ...information format 2063 File size error The size of the external file is greater than when it is opened The content added to the ORG file can no longer be described in the CFG file A 2064 File write...

Page 289: ...etected and replaced with a default value External device IDT A 2 TR1H1313 EPS 2086 Image processing table is inappropriate The value for the number of dots or unsharp mask for the image processing ta...

Page 290: ...rmat for the rmt_sw cfg file is incorrect No user name description No command description A 1 2154 2160 2161 2162 2163 File setup value error MTH board error SCN board error SNS board error HCP board...

Page 291: ...quire the output destination IP address fails The setting of the output destination IP address is improper E 1 21D0 HD open error An attempt to open a file fails No file HD failure A 1 21D1 HD write e...

Page 292: ...ection retry D 5 23BE Side positioning grip HP detection preparation retry D 5 23BF Side positioning grip operation error D 5 23C5 FFM drive W F disorder D 5 23C6 Driving shaft grip operation error D...

Page 293: ...detection preparation retry D 5 23DC After reading grip operation error D 5 23DE Elevation shelf movement error D 5 23E1 Feed IP suction failure retry D 5 23E4 Load IP suction failure retry D 5 TR1H12...

Page 294: ...after a predetermined period of time has elapsed D 5 23F8 After erasure conveyance motor error MB2 is stopped during IP length measurement conveyance but the pulse motor stop interrupt is not detected...

Page 295: ...transferred during read a connection with the target for the EDR data cannot be established Check the network connected units E 7 2482 EDR data transmission error When the EDR backup data is transferr...

Page 296: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 33 2 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006 MT 33 2 2 3 4 5 6 1 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 297: ...Faulty SCN board scanner hardware etc E 3 2572 Laser error 4 With status check after reading condition setup an error is detected Faulty SCN board scanner hardware etc E 3 2573 Insufficient laser powe...

Page 298: ...ormation format 2751 File open error No file HD failure A 1 2752 File format error File format check error File description is improper A 1 2753 File write error An attempt to write a file fails An at...

Page 299: ...Check the LP cable Check the LP I 8 2805 HYPER DRC USM image processing ignored The HYPER DRC USM image parameter is inputted but the IMG08B board is not installed Check the image parameter or instal...

Page 300: ...MG08A board I 7 2815 DSP10 self diagnostics error DSP diagnostics error minor Check the IMG08A board I 7 2816 DSP10 image processing error DSP image parameter error minor Check the image parameter I 7...

Page 301: ...hecksum error DSP checksum error minor Check the IMG08C board I 7 283F DSP31 self diagnostics error DSP diagnostics error minor Check the IMG08C board I 7 2840 DSP31 image processing error DSP image p...

Page 302: ...2945 Output interrupted by abort instruction The output is interrupted by an abort instruction The power switch is OFF F 2946 DSP application execution error A timeout occurs during startup of a DSP a...

Page 303: ...on error A command transmission to the DMS fails during input Command wait timeout Break state on the target receiving end Break state on the source sending end E 2961 Receive line break detection A r...

Page 304: ...faulty E 6 0461 Monitor image write error Write of the monitor image to the hard disk fails during read The HDD or CPU90E board or MTH08A board is faulty E 6 0462 EDR data write error Write of the sta...

Page 305: ...corrupted The HDD itself is faulty etc K 1 2A01 File format error The file format is improper The file format in the HDD is improper The file in the HDD is corrupted The HDD itself is faulty etc K 1 2...

Page 306: ...nline connected unit does not arrive within a certain time External unit online connected unit CPU90E board line cable K 4 2A25 Patient information search error not found A response indicating that pa...

Page 307: ...e communication between the CPU90E board and CPU90F board DMA 2 port memory is faulty D 2 Code Name Significance Occurrence Condition Detail Probable Cause Remedy Refer to Detail Denotes the detail in...

Page 308: ...eceive any compressed image G 2 2D51 File write error An attempt to write a file fails HD failure A 2D52 File close error An attempt to close a file fails HD failure A 3080 User setup standard gamma p...

Page 309: ...setup value check error siosetup idt occurs The parameter value for the data link layer parameter file is out of range A 1 3800 Receive line break detection A receive line break occurs Check the line...

Page 310: ...DMS fails Command wait timeout Break state on the target end Break state on the source end E 3920 SMCU transmission error A transmission fails The DMC08A board is faulty E 3921 Receive line break dete...

Page 311: ...ne break ON detection A receive line break is detected The line is disconnected Power of the online connected unit is shut down The line is broken from the online connected unit for some reason K 2 3C...

Page 312: ...U90F board is faulty M 3 3C68 Socket number zero The socket number acquired with the socket acquisition function js_socket is zero Information for LAN task analysis 3C69 Not transferable to transmissi...

Page 313: ...cket number zero The socket number acquired with the socket acquisition function js_socket is zero Information for LAN task analysis 3CE9 Not transferable to reception task A message cannot be transfe...

Page 314: ...AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code BBBBBBBB Character string of variable length up to 8 characters File name CCC Character string of fixed length 3 characters Extension DDDD Four decimal digits L...

Page 315: ...ber CCCC Four hexadecimal digits FINP element number DDDD Four hexadecimal digits FINP data length EEEE GGGGGGGGG G FFFFFFFFFFF FFFFF FCR image ID Character string of fixed length 16 characters NOTE 1...

Page 316: ...ters Patient ID DDDDDDDDDD Character string of fixed length 10 characters Exposure date EEEE Four hexadecimal digits Data start position F F Hexadecimal dump of variable length Original data _ _ is us...

Page 317: ...tension Blank if there is no extension DDDD Four decimal digits Line number _ _ _ _ is used if line number cannot be obtained as with a binary file D 2 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code D 3...

Page 318: ...digits Bar code D Shelf position E One decimal digit One decimal digit IP size 1 Top stage 2 Second stage 3 Third stage 4 Bottom stage 1 H 35 43 5 18 24ST 2 DK 35 35 6 24 30ST 3 4 10 12 7 18 24 HR 4...

Page 319: ...MA1 For the number of each motor see 2 3 1 Supplementary Explanation of Detail Information I One hexadecimal digit Failed motor number J One hexadecimal digit Subscanning mode number 0 Secondary eras...

Page 320: ...ts End status for function or message E 1 AAAA BBBBBBBB CCC DDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code BBBBBBBB Character string of variable length up to 8 characters File name CCC Character string...

Page 321: ...ze _ is used when it cannot be obtained E 4 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code E 5 AAAA B CCCC AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code B One hexadecimal digit DMA channel number CCCC Four he...

Page 322: ...Four hexadecimal digits Error code BB Two hexadecimal digits Service number C One hexadecimal digit Internal error code AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code BBB Character string of fixed length 3...

Page 323: ...B AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID G 2 AAAA BBBB CCCCCCCC DDDDDDDD AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code BBBB Four hexadecimal digits Image UID CCCCCCCC...

Page 324: ...ur hexadecimal digits Error code BBBBBBBB Character string of variable length up to 8 characters File name CCC Character string of fixed length 3 characters Extension Blank if there is no extension DD...

Page 325: ...One hexadecimal digit or no digit B Error description Film used 00 B4 film 05 8 x10 film 01 14 x 17 film 02 14 x14 film 01 Standard density 10 x 8 02 Standard density 10 x 12 03 Standard density 14 x...

Page 326: ...hexadecimal digits 90 degree rotation flag 00 Image area 01 Film character area HH Two hexadecimal digits Area type FF Two hexadecimal digits Film format 00 No location change 01 Changed correspond to...

Page 327: ...Character area 3 1 bottom of fourth frame II Two hexadecimal digits Area number JJ Two hexadecimal digits 180 degree rotation flag KK Two hexadecimal digits LR flag 00 180 degree rotation OFF 01 180 d...

Page 328: ...econd digit Reading image size code Same as the reading size code for DD Third digit 90 degree rotation designation 0 90 degree rotation OFF 90 degree rotation ON Fourth digit Search format 0 S image...

Page 329: ...image normal for 14 x17 14 x14 film 11 Two image normal for 14 x17 12 One image 8 x10 landscape for 14 x17 13 Two image pantomo for 14 x17 14 Four image for 14 x17 15 Film character position change fo...

Page 330: ...31 DSP31 32 DSP32 33 DSP33 CCCC Four hexadecimal digits End status DDDDDD Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area EEEEEE Six hexadecimal digits DSP memory error area FFFFFF Six hexadecimal digit...

Page 331: ...hexadecimal digits Error code BBBB Character string of four digits Image ID number CCCCCCCCCC Character string of 10 digits Barcode number DDD DDD 64 digit character string NOTE 10 digits for A07 or e...

Page 332: ...ot be obtained as with a binary file K 2 AAAA AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code K 3 AAAA B C AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code B One hexadecimal digit Receive command C One hexadecimal dig...

Page 333: ...Status End status for function or message DDDDDD KKKKKK Six hexadecimal digits DSP detail information _ _ _ _ _ _ is used if detail information internal to DSP cannot be obtained or if there is no me...

Page 334: ...f the device connected to the machine over the network CCCC Four hexadecimal digits Socket number or command number Socket number or command number obtained when a connection request is made _ _ _ _ i...

Page 335: ...ror code N 2 AAAA BBBBBBBB CCCCCCCC B B Eight hexadecimal digits LAN end status C C Eight hexadecimal digits Error number AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code N 3 AAAA BBBBBBBB B B Eight hexadecima...

Page 336: ...B Character string of variable length File name CCCC Four decimal digits Line number _ _ _ _ if a line number does not exist P AAAA BB BB AAAA Four hexadecimal digits Error code BBBB Character string...

Page 337: ...SA11 12 SA12 13 SA13 14 SA14 15 SA15 No Sensor name 16 SA16 17 SA17 18 SB1 19 SB2 20 SB3 No Sensor name 21 SB4 22 SB5 23 SC1 24 SC2 25 SD1 No Sensor name 26 SD2 27 SD3 28 SE1 29 SF1 30 SF2 No Sensor n...

Page 338: ...te down the top three liens of the message displayed and notify them to the Service Headquarters 2 Reset the machine Abort message Memory overflow CDM CdmInit Could not allocate memory for config data...

Page 339: ...upply fuse F1 CRT screen flicker CPU90E VGA90E CN7 CRT CN2 CPU90E NFB2 CRT fuse No CRT screen display CPU90E VGA90E CN19 CRT CN1 CN4 LED08A CN3 Power supply located on the right hand side DCOUT1 Shutd...

Page 340: ...FB6 NFB7 NFB9 NFB10 0537 0538 Power supply fuse F6 0538 SCN08A CN4 Subscanning unit SZ1 CNZ11 SCN08A NFB8 03E8 DRV08A CN5 SNS08A CN7 Up down IP removal unit CNMB1 SB1 CNB1 CNB2 CNB3 0532 0537 0538 SCN...

Page 341: ...oise from the IP removal unit Up down IP removal unit SVB1 Up down IP removal unit SB5 CNPB1 Up down IP removal unit SB2 CNMB2 03B1 Up down before side positioning belt dislocated Power supply fuse F1...

Page 342: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 73 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MT 73 2 3 4 5 6 1 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 343: ...4 is turned ON during cassette hold release after occurrence of 13E1 13E5 but SA3 7 11 and 15 do not turn OFF so that the cassette cannot be released 03A3 Cassette hold release is performed during ini...

Page 344: ...m block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Are SA3 7 11 and 15 normal See Section 6 2 2 of Chapter 6 to perform sensor checks Remove dust or soil from the sensors Power ON again to chec...

Page 345: ...or and SB4 inch metric sensor as well as the time taken for the IP to pass over SC1 This error occurs when the size of the remaining IP is out of spec as a result of the above operation 13A8 IP length...

Page 346: ...s SC1 normal With 6 MECH of M Utility execute sensor monitoring to check the sensor status With a slip of paper or the like block the sensor light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Li...

Page 347: ...ng of MC1 and passes over SC1 SC1 OFF to ON IP length measurement is performed according to the time taken to pass over SC1 thereby determining the IP size This error occurs when the IP that is convey...

Page 348: ...ty execute sensor monitoring to check the SC1 status With a slip of paper or the like block the SC1 light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocked close Light transmitted open...

Page 349: ...into the cassette suction conveyance is performed The IP is conveyed toward the cassette and completely passes over SB2 SB2 ON to OFF This error occurs when the IP has been conveyed to the up down IP...

Page 350: ...m block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Replace the following parts in order named MC1 MB2 faulty motor only DRV08A board Is SB2 normal With 6 MECH of M Utility execute sensor monito...

Page 351: ...tion The IP is conveyed to the side positioning conveyor by the driving of MD3 so that BCR reading is performed For the IP that is conveyed toward the top stopper the IP leading edge is detected by SD...

Page 352: ...Power ON Does MD3 rotate along with the conveyor roller during initialization self diagnostics Power OFF Are the connector connections from MD3 to DRV08A to JPS 1 board normal N Y Replace the followi...

Page 353: ...that caused the before reading error is conveyed returned from the side positioning conveyor to the up down IP removal unit The IP conveyed is conveyed from the up down IP removal unit toward the cass...

Page 354: ...rmal MB2 MC1 DRV08A JPS 1 board N N With all the cassettes set into all the shelves does the cassette cover open properly Y Adjust replace the following parts Movable roll Hold pin Cassette N Is the I...

Page 355: ...d the before reading error is conveyed returned from the side positioning conveyor to the up down IP removal unit The IP conveyed is conveyed from the up down IP removal unit toward the cassette by th...

Page 356: ...along with the conveyor rollers during initialization self diagnostics Power OFF Are the following connector connections normal MB2 MC1 DRV08A JPS 1 board N N N Y Check the error related system block...

Page 357: ...IP ejection process is executed The IP is conveyed toward the cassette by the driving of MF1 MC1 and MB2 The IP is conveyed from the up down IP removal unit toward the cassette and passes over SB2 SB...

Page 358: ...MB2 faulty motor only DRV08A board Is SB2 normal With 6 MECH of M Utility execute sensor monitoring to check the SB2 status With a slip of paper or the like block the SB2 light path to check that the...

Page 359: ...de positioning conveyor In order to execute the IP ejection process the IP is conveyed to the before side positioning conveyor by the driving of MD3 MZ1 When the IP conveyed to the before side positio...

Page 360: ...mal Rotate the MD3 driving belt by hand to check that it rotates smoothly Also make sure that the grip release mechanism functions properly Y Adjust replace the following parts Belt belt tension Conve...

Page 361: ...he machine During initialization each motor is activated and each sensor is used to search for any remaining IP left in the machine This error occurs when no IP is detected as a result of IP search al...

Page 362: ...R1H0029 EPS Power ON and clear 8 BACK UP MEMORY of M Utility Restart the machine again and check its status Manually eject the IP left in the machine Power ON and clear 8 BACK UP MEMORY of M Utility R...

Page 363: ...from the erasure con veyor toward the up down IP removal unit by the driving of MF1 MC1 and MB2 The IP is conveyed to the up down IP removal unit and it passes over SB2 SB2 OFF to ON This error occur...

Page 364: ...DRV08A JPS 1 board MF1 DRV08A JPS 1 board N N N Y Check the error related system block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Replace the following parts in order named MB2 MC1 MF1 faulty m...

Page 365: ...SD1 turns ON the HP of the latch assembly is detected This error occurs when SD1 does not transition from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF to ON during the above operation Reference If a...

Page 366: ...ring to check the SD1 status Move the side positioning conveyor to its home position by hand and block the SD1 light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocked close Light transm...

Page 367: ...n ON SD2 When SD2 is OFF during initialization MD2 is driven to turn ON SD2 This error occurs when SD2 fails to turn ON or when it does not transition from ON to OFF to ON during the above operation R...

Page 368: ...and block the SD light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocked close Light transmitted open The sensor status is close at the home position Remove dust or soil from the sensor...

Page 369: ...ed toward the subscanning unit The IP is conveyed to the subscanning unit and passes over SZ1 SZ1 OFF to ON As the IP passes over SZ1 SZ1 OFF to ON the IP leading edge is detected This error occurs wh...

Page 370: ...conveyor normal Move the side positioning conveyor by hand to check that the latch assembly pushes up the stopper N N Y Does the initialization self diagnostics end normally Troubleshoot it based on a...

Page 371: ...f the driving shaft is performed For the IP conveyed its leading edge is detected by SZ1 so that IP reading is initi ated IP reading conveyance is performed by the driving of MZ1 so that the IP is con...

Page 372: ...nitoring to check the SD3 status With a slip of paper or the like block the SD3 light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocked close Light transmitted open Y N Power OFF Remove...

Page 373: ...ng unit is driven to perform the grip grip release operation of the driven shaft The IP is conveyed to the subscanning unit and passes over SZ1 SZ1 OFF to ON As the IP passes over SZ1 SZ1 OFF to ON th...

Page 374: ...ake sure that the IP conveyance path is free of any foreign matter Y N Power OFF Are the connector connections from MZ1 to SNS08A to JPS 1 board normal N Y Replace the following parts in order named M...

Page 375: ...lanation During IP reading conveyance or during initialization MZ2 is driven to perform the grip grip release operation Either grip or grip release is detected as SZ2 turns ON OFF When SZ2 is OFF it i...

Page 376: ...the error related system block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Y N Power OFF Is the fuse F2 of the power supply unit JPS 1 normal Replace the following parts in order named Fuse F2...

Page 377: ...lanation During IP reading conveyance or during initialization MZ3 is driven to perform the grip grip release operation Either grip or grip release is detected as SZ3 turns ON OFF When SZ3 is OFF it i...

Page 378: ...the connectors as appropriate Y Replace the following parts in order named SZ3 SNS08A board N Power OFF Is the connector connection from MZ3 to SNS08A board normal N Check the error related system bl...

Page 379: ...rom the after reading conveyor to the erasure conveyor by the driving of ME2 The IP conveyed is conveyed toward the inverting stocker and passes over SF1 SF1 OFF to ON This error occurs when the IP fa...

Page 380: ...iving belt by hand to check that it rotates smoothly N Y Adjust replace the following parts Belt belt tension Conveyor roller shaft bearing Power ON Does ME2 rotate along with the conveyor roller duri...

Page 381: ...uide is activated to switch the conveyance direction to the erasure unit This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF2 SF2 status does not transition from OFF to ON or when it does not complete...

Page 382: ...r roller shaft bearing Power ON Do ME2 MF1 rotate along with the conveyor rollers during initialization self diagnostics Is the drive gear of MF1 installed properly Are the connector connections from...

Page 383: ...s activated the IP conveyance direction is switched to the erasure lamp unit After the conveyance direction is switched the IP is conveyed toward the erasure lamp by the driving of MF1 and the IP pass...

Page 384: ...zation self diagnostics Power OFF Are the connector connections from MF1 to DRV08A to JPS 1 board normal N N N Y Check the error related system block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate...

Page 385: ...e is activated the IP conveyance direction is switched to the erasure lamp unit After the conveyance direction is switched the IP is conveyed toward the erasure lamp by the driving of MF1 and the IP p...

Page 386: ...1 normal With 6 MECH of M Utility execute sensor monitoring to check the SF1 status With a slip of paper or the like block the SF1 light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocke...

Page 387: ...lamp by the driving of MF1 and the IP passes over SF2 again SF2 OFF to ON The IP is conveyed as erased by the erasure lamp unit and passes over SF3 SF3 OFF to ON This error occurs when the IP fails t...

Page 388: ...y foreign matter Power ON Does MF1 rotate along with the conveyor roller during initialization self diagnostics Power OFF Are the connector connections from MF1 to DRV08A to JPS 1 board normal N Y Che...

Page 389: ...the driving of MC1 and it passes over SB2 SB2 OFF to ON This error occurs when the IP fails to pass over SF3 SF3 status does not transition from OFF to ON or when the IP fails to pass over SB2 SB2 st...

Page 390: ...ctuates smoothly Adjust replace the following parts Path changeover guide SOLC1 Y Y N N Y Check the error related system block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Replace the following p...

Page 391: ...the erasure is complete SOLC1 is driven to effect path changeover in order to convey the IP toward the cassette The IP conveyed from the erasure conveyor to the before side positioning conveyor passes...

Page 392: ...owing parts Belt belt tension Connection belt Conveyor roller shaft bearing Grip spring Do MF1 MC1 rotate along with the conveyor rollers during i nitialization self diagnostics N N N N N N Power OFF...

Page 393: ...s The remaining IP detected is conveyed toward the inverting stocker of the erasure conveyor and the IP passes over SF2 and SF4 in this order After the IP passes over SF2 SF2 ON to OFF the driving of...

Page 394: ...on Shaft bearing Grip release mechanism Power ON Does ME2 rotate along with the conveyor roller during initialization self diagnostics Power OFF Are the connector connections from ME2 to DRV08A to JPS...

Page 395: ...rmed When SF2 detects the IP MF1 is driven to convey the IP toward the erasure lamp unit thereby causing it to pass over SF3 SF3 OFF to ON When SF3 detects the IP MF1 is driven to convey the IP toward...

Page 396: ...nector connections from MF1 to DRV08A to JPS 1 board normal N N Y Check the error related system block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Replace the following parts in order named MF1...

Page 397: ...tor As SE1 turns ON the HP is detected resulting in the grip condition As SE1 turns OFF the grip release condition is entered This error occurs when SE1 does not turn ON or OFF during the above operat...

Page 398: ...follows Light blocked close Light transmitted open The sensor status is close at the home position Remove dust or soil from the sensor Power ON again to execute sensor monitoring Is SE1 normal Restart...

Page 399: ...the HP of the elevation unit is detected When SA17 turns ON the elevation unit is subsequently moved for detection of SB3 shelf 1 This error occurs when SA17 does not turn ON during the above operati...

Page 400: ...of M Utility execute sensor monitoring to check the SA17 status With a slip of paper or the like block the SA17 light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocked close Light tran...

Page 401: ...t is subsequently moved for detection of SB3 shelf 1 The stop position of the elevation unit is determined as SB3 detects a transition from ON to OFF to ON This error occurs when SB3 does not turn ON...

Page 402: ...ECH of M Utility execute sensor monitoring to check the SB3 status With a slip of paper or the like block the SB3 light path to check that the sensor status is as follows Light blocked close Light tra...

Page 403: ...to OFF to ON is detected to confirm the suction cup position MB1 is driven and the suction cups are stopped at an accurate position by pulse driving This error occurs when SB1 does not turn ON or when...

Page 404: ...am and connect the connectors as appropriate Replace the following parts in order named MB1 DRV08A board Is the actuator that blocks the SB1 light path normal Make sure that it is free from distortion...

Page 405: ...ed so that SA3 7 11 and 15 turn ON thereby detecting the hold This error occurs when SOLA1 4 turn OFF but SA3 7 11 and 15 fail to turn ON so that the cassette hold cannot be detected during the above...

Page 406: ...SOLA1 4 relevant shelf turned ON and the hold pin released during initialization self diagnostics Check the error related system block diagram and connect the connectors as appropriate Check the erro...

Page 407: ...nd SA3 7 11 and 15 turn OFF so that the hold pin release is detected This error occurs when either SA3 7 11 or 15 does not turn OFF a shelf where the cassette hold cannot be released during the above...

Page 408: ...orm sensor checks Remove dust or soil from the sensors Power ON again to check the sensors again Are SA3 7 11 and 15 normal Restart the machine and check its status Are the connector connections from...

Page 409: ...he above operation If there is no cassette during initialization During initialization SOLA1 4 are turned ON to effect cassette hold release As SOLA1 4 turn ON the hold pin is lowered so that SA3 7 11...

Page 410: ...lowing parts in order named SOLA1 4 relevant shelf DRV08A board Replace the following parts in order named SA3 7 11 15 relevant shelf SNS08A board FR1H0112 EPS Preliminary steps 1 Power OFF the machin...

Page 411: ...barcode of the IP that is set is read during feed conveyance The barcode is read by the BCR of the side positioning conveyor This error occurs when the barcode of the IP cannot be read during the abov...

Page 412: ...ng face is lit in red Power OFF FR1H0115 EPS Preliminary steps 1 Power OFF the machine and remove the covers 2 Turn OFF the high voltage switch S1 of the SCN08A board 3 Check for any foreign matter le...

Page 413: ...etected Supplementary explanation The erasure lamp which consists of five fluorescent lamps is turned on to erasure the data of the IP This error occurs when the unlit condition or blinking condition...

Page 414: ...t the erasure lamp is not blinking or unlit Are the connector connections from LAMP 1 5 to JPS 1 board normal FR1H0118 EPS Restart the machine and check its status Check the error related system block...

Page 415: ...ted during reading is greater than 400 mR it is detected as overexposure Supplementary explanation While the IP is read by the subscanning unit its IP dosage is also checked The exposed IP is erased b...

Page 416: ...used From M Utility select 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING and 1 SYSTEM in sequence to change the sensitivity setting SFC SFD Power ON N Y Is the sensitivity setting proper FR1H0119 EPS Replace the following...

Page 417: ...ading conveyance is performed the ID card of the patient is read by the ID terminal The barcode in the cassette exposed is read by the barcode reader of the ID terminal IP reading conveyance is perfor...

Page 418: ...IP normal Make sure that the barcode indication is free of soil N Power OFF Is the BCR reading face normal Make sure that the BCR reading face is free of soil Is the relevant ID card is read by the ID...

Page 419: ...is read but the spec of the IP type is different Supplementary explanation The barcode of the IP is read by the BCR of the side positioning conveyor to deter mine the IP type The IP type supported sh...

Page 420: ...that the BCR reading face is free of soil Clean the BCR reading face N Is the IP generation within spec Make sure that the IP type complies with type V FR1H0122 EPS CAUTION Before remedying this error...

Page 421: ...e found Supplementary explanation The exposure information of the patient exposure anatomical region exposure menu modality is inputted to the ID terminal via an ID card During IP reading conveyance t...

Page 422: ...r OFF Is the IP normal Make sure that the barcode indication is free of soil N Power OFF Is the BCR reading face normal Make sure that the BCR reading face is free of soil Does the exposure informatio...

Page 423: ...performed the ID card of the patient is read by the ID terminal The barcode in the cassette exposed is read by the barcode reader of the ID terminal IP reading conveyance is performed The IP barcode...

Page 424: ...between the machine and IDT normal Make sure that the cable is free of defect Is the IDT connected properly to the machine Make sure that the modular jack is connected on the machine and IDT sides as...

Page 425: ...om the home position toward the cassette by the driving of MB1 To suck the IP with the suction cups PB1 is turned ON When the suction of the IP by the suction cups is detected SB5 is turned ON This er...

Page 426: ...named PB1 DRV08A board N N Power OFF Power ON Power OFF Are the connector connections from PB1 to DRV08A to JPS 1 board normal Replace the following parts in order named SB5 SNS08A board Power OFF Is...

Page 427: ...P is sucked by the suction cups SB5 is ON This error occurs when SB5 is turned OFF while the IP is being moved by predeter mined pulses to the grip rollers during the above operation 13E5 The IP that...

Page 428: ...the suction cups are installed properly Check the suction cups for any soil or deformation Power OFF Adjust replace the following parts Air hose Hose joint Is the air hose of the IP removal unit norm...

Page 429: ...grip roller The IP fed to the grip roller is conveyed to SB2 by the driving of MB2 As SB2 turns ON the leading edge of the IP is detected This error occurs when the IP is fed to the grip roller but S...

Page 430: ...ng parts in order named SB2 SNS08A board N N Power OFF Is the connector connection from SB2 to SNS08A board normal Y N Y Power OFF Is the IP normal Make sure that it is not soiled curled or bent FR1H0...

Page 431: ...To suck the IP that is conveyed to the IP removal unit the suction cups are moved from the load standby position to the load suction position by the driving of MB1 To suck the IP with the suction cups...

Page 432: ...he suction cups are installed properly Check the suction cups for any soil or deformation Power OFF Adjust replace the following parts Suction cup arm shaft bearing Does PB1 rotate along during initia...

Page 433: ...IP jam error occurs you should basically complete the following procedure 1 Turn OFF the machine 2 Turn the machine back ON The initialization sequence is performed 3 Check whether the jammed IP is d...

Page 434: ...oad conveyance remaining IP ejection error Side positioning conveyance remaining IP ejection error IP position information error Load standby remaining IP ejection error Side positioning HP operation...

Page 435: ...ioning HP detection retry Side positioning HP detection preparation retry Side positioning operation error Side positioning grip HP detection retry Side positioning grip HP detection preparation retry...

Page 436: ...S FRONT Cassette set unit Up down IP removal unit Before side positioning conveyor Side positioning conveyor Subscanning unit After reading conveyor Erasure conveyor Remedy 1 Remedy 2 Remedy 8 IP Jam...

Page 437: ...backward Recovery procedure Gain access from the front or right hand side of the machine a 1 Remove the upper front cover 2 Remove the tray of cassette set unit 4 1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of...

Page 438: ...Recovery procedure a Gain access from the front or right hand side of the machine 1 Remove the upper front cover 2 Remove the tray of cassette set unit 4 1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette...

Page 439: ...rward or backward Recovery procedure a Gain access from the front or right hand side of the machine 1 Remove the right hand side cover 2 Rotate the before side positioning conveyor drive shaft by hand...

Page 440: ...ward or backward Recovery procedure a Gain access from the front or right hand side of the machine 1 Remove the right hand side cover 2 Release the side positioning conveyor grip 3 Rotate the before s...

Page 441: ...move the IP from the top frame slit of the before side positioning conveyor b Gain access from the rear or right hand side of the machine 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the rear guide from the befor...

Page 442: ...by hand to position the entire IP in the after reading conveyor 2 Remove the right hand side cover 3 Pull out the scanner unit and take out the IP If you cannot directly access the IP in the subscanni...

Page 443: ...orward until it comes of the machine Remedy 10 Jam location Before side positioning conveyor or erasure conveyor Cause Conveyance failure IP status A certain portion of the jammed IP is located in the...

Page 444: ...ntially touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel M Utility starts Area to be touched FR1B1086 EPS Routine screen screen made to CSL specification U Utility screen Util...

Page 445: ...onveyance count to 10 6 Repeatedly select 0 QUIT to exit M Utility 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTI...

Page 446: ...at the machine does not emit any abnormal sound or odor Check that the IPs are conveyed in the order of cassette positioning Check that the erasure lamp cooling fan FANF1 operates 9 After completion o...

Page 447: ...r that troubleshooting procedures for the image output system and X ray exposure system are omitted in this chapter 3 1 Troubleshooting for Scanner Related Errors Procedures 1 Check the error log for...

Page 448: ...nerated light enters the photomultiplier The IP generated light is already abnormal Optics including the laser Light collecting guide light collecting mirror Subscanning X ray source IP Conveyors Eras...

Page 449: ...an error 2545 HV voltage error 2 occurs concurrently with the abnormal image Note however that it will not be detected if the noise is minuscule No 102 Horizontal streaks 1 Banding like streaks are d...

Page 450: ...riving side grip motor MZ2 or driven side grip motor MZ3 is improper Check and Reference 40 Unit mm 30 FR1H1852 EPS No 104 Horizontal streaks 3 A horizontal streak is developed about 60 mm from the to...

Page 451: ...n the abnormal image occurred Use the virtual image generation mode to isolate the cause 70 Unit mm FR1H1854 EPS 10 10 Setting in Virtual Generation Mode for Image Signal in Maintenance Utility No 106...

Page 452: ...s high voltage switch S1 and the software switch in the ON position Checking SCN08A Board Checking PMT08A Board FR1H1856 EPS No 108 Uniformly exposed image with midtone A uniformly exposed image with...

Page 453: ...hading correction properly Cleaning Light Collecting Guide and Light Collecting Mirror Thin streak Thick streak FR1H1858 EPS No 303 Jitters Sync is misaligned by one or several pixels in the main scan...

Page 454: ...stics during machine initialization If the results of the self diagnostics indicate an error replace the relevant board SCN08A Board Check connection between each of the SCN08A IMG07B IMG08A IMG08B IM...

Page 455: ...ts of the self diagnostics indicate an error replace the relevant board FR1H1862 EPS No 204 Improper image 4 A full image in each size of 14 x 17 35cm x 43cm 14 x 14 35cm x 35cm and 10 x 12 18cm x 24c...

Page 456: ...tics during machine initialization If the results of the self diagnostics indicate an error replace the relevant board SCN08A Board FR1H1864 EPS No 206 Improper film characters 1 Although the image an...

Page 457: ...uring machine initialization If the results of the self diagnostics indicate an error replace the relevant board Replacing and Adjusting CPU90E Board FR1H1866 EPS No 208 Halos Multiple halos are devel...

Page 458: ...r might have been used without secondary erasure Check and Reference FR1H1869 EPS No 301 White spots or speckles One pixel or several pixels in one line have a markedly lower density so white spots or...

Page 459: ...ioning operation is improper The irradiation field is improper The parameter for adjusting the main scan format is improper Check and Reference FR1H1870 EPS No 305 Improper format 2 The bottom or top...

Page 460: ...or left edge of the image is aslant Probable Causes The side positioning operation is improper The side positioning location is improper The subscanning unit and side positioning unit are misaligned...

Page 461: ...named DRV08A board SOLA1 4 Restart the machine and check its status Power OFF Power OFF Branch 1 Restore it Then restart the machine and check its status Cassette Removal Standard Procedures Step 1 Re...

Page 462: ...ly plug them in Y Replace the fuse Then restart the machine and check its status Step 2 N Y Y Is the breaker fuse nn normal Is the 24V system normal Power OFF Restore it Then restart the machine and c...

Page 463: ...iring To check for harness continuity the machine should be powered OFF beforehand N Replace the following parts in order named DRV08A board LEDA1 4 Preliminary steps 1 Power OFF the machine and remov...

Page 464: ...the DIP switches and jumpers set correctly N Y Y Set it correctly Then restart the machine and check its status Step 3 Is the memory set in the CPU90E board correctly Replace the following boards MTH0...

Page 465: ...0 5 10 10 High res pix mm 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 No of pixels Standard 1760x2140 1760x1760 1670x2010 2000x2510 1576x1976 1770x2370 885x2140 2364x2964 1770x2370 High res 3520x4280 3520x3520 2505x30...

Page 466: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 197 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MT 197 2 3 4 5 6 1 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 467: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 198 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 198 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS 5 Machine Circuit Diagram FR1H1360 EPS...

Page 468: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 199 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 199 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1361 EPS...

Page 469: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 200 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 200 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1362 EPS...

Page 470: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 201 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 201 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1363 EPS...

Page 471: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 202 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 202 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1364 EPS...

Page 472: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 203 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 203 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1365 EPS...

Page 473: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 204 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 204 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1366 EPS...

Page 474: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 205 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 205 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1367 EPS...

Page 475: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 206 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 206 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1368 EPS...

Page 476: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 207 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 207 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1369 EPS...

Page 477: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 208 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 208 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1370 EPS...

Page 478: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 209 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 209 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1371 EPS...

Page 479: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 210 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 210 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1372 EPS...

Page 480: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 211 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 211 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1373 EPS...

Page 481: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 212 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 212 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1374 EPS...

Page 482: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 213 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 213 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1375 EPS...

Page 483: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 214 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 214 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1376 EPS...

Page 484: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 215 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 215 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1377 EPS...

Page 485: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 216 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MT 216 2 3 4 5 6 1 C ONTENTS FR1H1378 EPS...

Page 486: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT 217 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MT 217 2 3 4 5 6 1 CONTENTS 6 Power Supply Circuit Diagram Being prepared...

Page 487: ...ATA in sequence The following files are copied to the floppy disk IRSET ORG IRSET OFG FILMFMT ORG FILMFMT OFG IRSTATUS ORG IRSTATUS CFG 4 Remove the floppy disk from the FDD of the machine and insert...

Page 488: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 2 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006 MT_A1 2 BLANK PAGE...

Page 489: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 3 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006 MT_A1 3 BLANK PAGE...

Page 490: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MT_A1 4 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006 MT_A1 4 BLANK PAGE...

Page 491: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Checks Replacement and Adjustment of Parts MC...

Page 492: ...ted Issue date 05 31 99 04 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages FM2460 11 20 99 05 Corrections FM2638 MC 2 6 65 132 138 140 142 143 144 155 161 205 255 1 255 2 04 20 2001 06 Correction...

Page 493: ...IN Sensors SA2 6 10 14 4 6 Checking and Replacing Cassette Hold Sensors SA3 7 11 15 4 7 Checking and Replacing Mammo ST Sensors SA4 8 12 16 4 8 Checking Replacing and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids...

Page 494: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MC 3 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1 8 10 CONTENTS MC 3 BLANK PAGE...

Page 495: ...h is in the ON position while 9 HV ON is displayed when it is in the OFF position 1 Touch the U Utility button The screen switches to the U Utility mode 2 Touch the upper left and upper right corners...

Page 496: ...ion panel in sequence M Utility is activated 3 Select 9 HV OFF The high voltage switch is turned OFF and 9 HV OFF displayed on the screen switches to 9 HV ON 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION...

Page 497: ...ouch the U Utility button The screen switches to the U Utility mode 6 Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 7 Drive the actuator...

Page 498: ...SA15 SZ2 SZ1 SZ3 SD3 MD2 MD1 SF3 MD3 MZ3 MZ2 SE1 ME1 ME2 MZ1 SF1 SF2 SF4 MF1 SA13 SA9 SA5 SOLF1 SA1 SA17 SOLA1 SOLA2 SOLA3 SOLA4 NOTE The I O symbol has the following meaning SD2 Serial number Unit sy...

Page 499: ...ding conveyance standby IP sensor Changeover IP sensor Load standby IP sensor Overrun IP sensor Safety thermostat Safety thermostat Unlit lamp sensor PS IP conveyance sensor IP conveyance sensor IP co...

Page 500: ...Reflective sensor FR1H1493 EPS OFF 0 OPEN ON 1 CLOSE Microswitch SA2 6 10 14 FR1H1491 EPS OFF 0 OPEN ON 1 CLOSE Microswitch SA4 8 12 16 FR1H1492 EPS ON 1 CLOSE OFF 0 OPEN Sensor Monitoring Screen Unde...

Page 501: ...d so that the machine is placed in a sensor monitoring enabled state 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE U...

Page 502: ...NER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING 6 0 QUIT 1 MOTOR 2 ACTUATOR 3 SENSOR 4 UNIT MU 3 0 QUIT 1 NUMBER 2 MONITOR 3 MONITOR ALL MU SEN 2 MU SEN 2 1 SA...

Page 503: ...conveyor D MD 1 MD 2 MD 3 Side positioning motor Grip release motor IP transport motor Pulse motor Pulse motor Pulse motor Drives the side positioning mechanism Roller grip release Conveys the IP Aft...

Page 504: ...LF1 8 SOLC1 9 LAMP STB 10 LAMP ON 11 FFM INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR 1 11 1 0 QUIT 1 NUMBER 2 DRIVE 3 STOP MU AUT FR1H1758 EPS 0 SP D E F A B C 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 DEL BS ENT Caps 0 SP D E F A B C 7 8 9...

Page 505: ...r the actuator number 3 Select 11 FFM The following message appears INPUT THE ROTATION DERECTION 1 CW 2 CCW FIXED X Meaning Enter the rotation direction X represents the rotation direction either 1 or...

Page 506: ...0 QUIT 1 NUMBER 2 DRIVE 3 STOP MU AUT 3 MU AUT 3 1 SOLA1 2 SOLA2 3 SOLA3 4 SOLA4 5 PB1 6 SVB1 7 SOLF1 8 SOLC1 9 LAMP STB 10 LAMP ON 11 FFM INPUT THE NUMBER OF SENSOR 1 11 11 0 QUIT 1 NUMBER 2 DRIVE 3...

Page 507: ...g The backup memory has been initialized Area to be touched FR1B1086 EPS Routine screen screen made to CSL specification U Utility screen Utility Return 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETT...

Page 508: ...C 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 DEL BS ENT FR1H1237 EPS Caps The following files are cleared from the HD IMG Set processing information information for image number generation HV ON OFF information IPH IP positio...

Page 509: ...processing Processed image reproduction output Click sound Date time setup FD operation Touch panel parallax correction Multiframe forced output Printer selection Utility Return CRT test pattern disp...

Page 510: ...ch the ENT key for confirmation When the setting is confirmed OK appears below the entry line If the date or time is entered incorrectly press the BS backspace key to return to the character to be cor...

Page 511: ...ng the top of the cover toward yourself pull it up and out 5 Make sure that the high voltage switch S1 of the SCN08A board is in the OFF posi tion 6 Upper rear cover truss M4x12 x4 7 Lower rear cover...

Page 512: ...ot to confuse these screws during installation 11 Stack table truss M4x6 x2 Using a 2 mm Allen wrench or so forth first remove the screw covers and then the screws 12 Lower front inner cover BR M4x8 x...

Page 513: ...C 22 Upper rear cover Lower rear cover Lower front inner cover Upper left hand side cover Lower left hand side cover Stack table Lower front cover SCN08A board Upper right hand side cover Lower right...

Page 514: ...lation CAUTION Before installing the cover make sure that the high voltage switch on the SCN08A board is ON NOTE Accomplish positioning at the time of multi stage cassette loading cover installation I...

Page 515: ...ide the multi stage cassette loading cover until the scale comes into contact with the cassette set unit entry reference guide protrusion level difference 0 5 1 mm and then tighten the four screws tha...

Page 516: ...lti stage cassette loading cover may be slightly warped when secured though this will not pose any problem Alignment with the cassette set unit should take first priority 6 Connect connector CNT1 7 Re...

Page 517: ...ding cover 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 2 Disconnect the connectors CNA1 3 from the cassette set unit CNB1 3 4 from the up down IP removal unit 3 Slide the tensioner until the timing belt is rem...

Page 518: ...4 to the up down IP removal unit 4 Attach the timing belt to the timing belt wheel 5 Put the tensioner back where it was Loosen the screw BR M4x8 that retains the tensioner Flick the timing belt seve...

Page 519: ...and Reinstalling Tray of Cassette Set Unit 2 Remove the six screws that retain the cassette set unit 3 Pull out the cassette set unit horizontally NOTES When pulling out the cassette set unit place th...

Page 520: ...ts position place the IP removal arm in the home position Also adjust the IP removal height for the home position or the first to fourth shelf position If an attempt is made to insert the cassette set...

Page 521: ...hutter Assembly Removal of Shutter Assembly 1 Pull out the tray of the cassette set unit or take out the cassette set unit 4 1 Pulling Out and Pushing In Tray of Cassette Set Unit 4 2 Removing and Rei...

Page 522: ...pushed against both right and left side plates of the cassette set unit The cover of the shutter assembly opens and closes smoothly Replacement of Shutter 1 Remove the shutter assembly Removal of Shu...

Page 523: ...place A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel Cassette FR1H4045 EPS FRONT Cassette set unit SA1 SA5 SA9 SA13 3 Pull out the cassette A message indicating that the...

Page 524: ...remove the sensor pinch the latches by fingers FRONT FR1H1055 EPS SA1 5 9 13 Bracket 2 3 3 Connector This bracket should not be removed Cassette set unit Latch 4 Install a new sensor 3 5 Sensors Not R...

Page 525: ...in place A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel Cassette FR1H4046 EPS FRONT Cassette set unit SA2 SA6 SA10 SA14 3 Pull out the cassette A message indicating that...

Page 526: ...sette Set Unit 2 Cut the cable tie 3 Disconnect the connectors SA2 6 10 14 4 Remove SA2 6 10 and 14 FR1H1057 EPS SA6 SA2 SA10 SA14 FRONT Connector Cassette set unit 3 SA2 6 10 14 Double sems M2x10 x2...

Page 527: ...connectors CNA1 2 of the cassette set unit 4 2 Removing and Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit 3 Power ON the machine The initialization sequence is started and after 30 to 60 seconds have passed a softw...

Page 528: ...r SA2 6 10 14 to be checked slowly move the mounting bracket bit by bit toward the scale and tighten the screw in place where the sensor changes status from OPEN to CLOSE 12 Slide the scale until the...

Page 529: ...so that SA3 7 11 15 can be moni tored 2 2 Checking Various Sensors 4 Insert a 1 5 mm Allen wrench straight into the hold manual release hole to push the lever A message indicating that the sensor is...

Page 530: ...the mouting bracket The sensor is secured to the bracket by four latches To remove the sensor pinch the latches by fingers 4 Install a new sensor 3 5 Sensors Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting...

Page 531: ...dicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel 4 Set a mammo type cassette in place When the cassette is inserted a message indicating that the sensor is OPEN appears Immediately aft...

Page 532: ...e tie FRONT SA8 SA12 Cassette set unit SA4 SA16 4 4 5 Sensor assembly Sensor bracket BR M4x8 Loosen screw BR M4x8 3 CNA4 8 12 16 2 6 For reinstallation reverse the removal steps When attaching the mou...

Page 533: ...42 4 8 Checking Replacing and Adjusting Cassette Hold Solenoids SOLA1 4 Checks 1 Place the machine in a cassette hold solenoid SOLA1 4 operation enabled state 2 2 Checking Various Sensors 2 Set a cas...

Page 534: ...DE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING 6 0 QUIT 1 MOTOR 2 ACTUATOR 3 SENSOR 4 UNIT MU 2 0 QUIT 1 NUMBER 2 DRIVE 3 STOP M...

Page 535: ...ere is nothing abnormal If anything abnormal is found with a solenoid replace it and then check it again 11 Select 0 QUIT The operation is exited to return to 2 ACTUATOR menu Example 2 DRIVE is select...

Page 536: ...ette Set Unit 2 Disconnect the connector for the solenoid to be replaced from the side plate 3 Remove the three solenoid retaining screws to take out the solenoid 4 Install new solenoid 5 Connect the...

Page 537: ...te hold pin sliding hole and then grip the retaining bracket used for transit with the cover closing roller 6 Raise the solenoid until the cassette hold pin contacts the protruding portion of the reta...

Page 538: ...t corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 5 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor Nos is displayed 6 Type in the number of...

Page 539: ...el CAUTION Be sure to position the actuator below SA17 If the machine is booted up with the actuator positioned above SA17 the home position HP cannot be detected during initialization so that the IP...

Page 540: ...des to be replace are located 4 12 Replacing Rubber Rollers of Cassette Set Unit 3 While holding down the mounting bracket remove the four hex socket head bolts from the inch metric guides 4 Remove th...

Page 541: ...et unit by hand to withdraw the hold pin insert the cassette into the cassette set unit 4 Release the manual release lever to secure the cassette with the hold pin 5 Align the cassette to the referenc...

Page 542: ...Toppling Prevention Bracket FRONT Cassette set unit Inch metric movable roll Top view FR1H1380 EPS Reference side Spring 24x30 mammo movable roll 24x30 mammo movable roll assembly retaining bracket 3...

Page 543: ...the rearward toppling prevention bracket in the direction of arrow as shown below toward the shutter assembly the descent of the trailing edge of the movable roll is decreased FR1H1763 EPS The descent...

Page 544: ...ling prevention bracket in the direction of arrow as shown below toward the trailing edge of the movable roll the descent of the trailing edge of the movable roll is decreased FR1H1764 EPS The descent...

Page 545: ...e trailing edge of the movable roll is decreased 7 Reinstall the shutter assembly 4 3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly 8 Reinstall the cassette set unit 4 2 Removing the Reinstalling Cassett...

Page 546: ...he cassette set unit 4 3 Removing and Reinstalling Shutter Assembly 2 Remove the two grip springs of the rubber roller to be removed 3 Remove the two bearings and two housings 4 Replace the rubber rol...

Page 547: ...er Assembly 2 Disconnect the connector SA3 7 11 15 at the stage where the guide plate to be removed is located 3 Remove the two grip springs of the rubber roller at the stage where the guide plate to...

Page 548: ...the guide plate onto the side plate 9 Remove the two screws that retain the guide plate onto the stay NOTE Use care not to confuse the screws to be removed Remove screw BR M4x8 x2 Cassette set unit 8...

Page 549: ...T 11 While slightly opening the left hand side plate to avoid the half punches lift up the inner side of the guide plate 12 With the mammo ST sensors SA4 8 12 16 pushed in while opening the right hand...

Page 550: ...check the following points The three half punches should be fitted The guide plate should not interfere with the mammo ST sensors SA4 8 12 16 The guide plate should not interfere with the actuators o...

Page 551: ...SB1 and then check it again 1 Power ON the machine 2 Make sure that the distance between the bearing flange on the left side of the IP removal arm and the left side plate is 86 5 1 mm FRONT 2 FR1H1240...

Page 552: ...emove the cassette set unit 4 2 Removing the Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit 2 Disconnect the connector SB1 NOTE If it is difficult to disconnect the connector rotate the MB3 timing belt to move the IP...

Page 553: ...eration panel is inoperative and does not respond at all even if you touch it In such an instance perform a reset and wait until the software version number Axx appears 3 Select 5 MECHANICAL UTILITY 1...

Page 554: ...Rotate the MB3 timing belt to lower the up down IP removal unit until the connector CNSB2 is visible through the window 3 Remove the protective bracket 4 Remove the cassette inlet IP sensor SB2 5 Disc...

Page 555: ...f the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 5 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor numbers is displayed 6 Type in the number of the eac...

Page 556: ...wheel clockwise as seen from the rear until the actuator blocks the SB3 light path A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel 10 Repeat steps 8 and 9 several times I...

Page 557: ...nect the connector with the bracket fixed moment is applied to the connector thus damaging the connector 2 Disconnect the connector SB4 3 Remove the bracket from SB4 FR1H1078 EPS Bracket Sems M3x6 x2...

Page 558: ...B5 make sure with PB1 driven that the sensor is CLOSE when the suction hose is pinched and OPEN when it is released Replacement 1 Remove the SB5 retaining bracket 2 Remove the hose and FAST ON termina...

Page 559: ...cing Suction Pump PB1 1 Rotate the timing belt until the IP removal unit is moved up away about 250 mm from the tray of the cassette set unit to facilitate PB1 removal 2 Cut the cable clamp 3 Remove t...

Page 560: ...hose from the PB1 7 Remove the two screws one of them should be merely loosened that retain PB1 and take out the PB1 from the pump assembly Suction nozzle Hose FR1H1496 EPS PB1 8 Install a new PB1 to...

Page 561: ...the cassette set unit to facilitate SVB1 removal 2 Disconnect the connector CNSVB1 3 Cut the cable tie that retains the hose in place 4 Pull out the hose from SVB1 5 Remove SVB1 Remove the two SVB1 re...

Page 562: ...1 8 CONTENTS MC 71 5 8 Replacing Suction Cups 1 Pull out the IP removal arm toward yourself NOTE When pulling out the IP removal arm do not grasp its center If its center is grasped the IP removal ar...

Page 563: ...Replace the two suction cups and the two packings NOTES Do not rotate the suction cup retaining screws while holding the suction cup rubber portions Rotate the suction cup retaining screws with a thi...

Page 564: ...et unit to facilitate PB1 removal 2 Cut the cable clamp 3 Remove the bracket FRONT FR1H1767 EPS Bracket BR M4x8 x2 IP removal unit MB3 Timing belt MB1 1 3 Cable clamp 2 4 Remove the cable clamp 5 Disc...

Page 565: ...At this time put the timing belt onto the timing belt wheel 9 Connect the connector CNMB1 10 Install the bracket 11 Put the cable clamp back where it was NOTE After putting the cable clamp back where...

Page 566: ...3 Disconnect the connector CNMB2 4 Take out MB2 5 Remove the timing belt pulley and wheel from the MB2 taken out and attach them to a new MB2 FR1H1209 EPS FRONT MB2 Pan head M4x10 x2 Bracket Timing be...

Page 567: ...3 is removed IP removal unit Timing belt FRONT FR1H1072 EPS Cable tie 1 2 3 Remove the cable clamp 4 Disconnect the connector CNMB3 5 From the rear of the machine remove the two MB3 retaining screws a...

Page 568: ...use the worm gear becomes free when MB3 is removed IP removal unit Timing belt FRONT FR1H1072 EPS Cable tie 1 2 3 Remove the cable clamp 4 Disconnect the connector CNMB3 5 From the rear of the machine...

Page 569: ...sorber is attached 3 Remove the spring from the wire 4 Remove the wire from the roller 5 Remove the left roller assembly from the shock absorber attached guide plate 6 Remove the four screws two of th...

Page 570: ...shock absorber attached guide plate C and take out the shock absorber attached guide plate C from the stay Shock absorber attached guide plate A Shock absorber attached guide plate B Shock absorber at...

Page 571: ...ck absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide to which the shock absorber is at tached 3 Reinstall the shock absorber attached guides Fit the lower portion of t...

Page 572: ...rear of the machine the three screws that retain the shock absorber attached guide plate FRONT Vertical conveyor FR1H1483 EPS Shock absorber attached guide plate BR M4x8 x3 Rear of IP removal unit Rea...

Page 573: ...ngeover guide 3 Remove the single screw that retains the elevation changeover guide to the arm Using a Phillips stubby screwdriver or the like remove the screw 4 Remove the arm 5 Remove both the right...

Page 574: ...ed elevation changeover guide Vertical conveyor FRONT 8 Install a new elevation changeover guide 9 Reinstall both the right and left slide bearings removed at step 6 10 From the front side of the mach...

Page 575: ...ermost grip spring Also keep in mind that the right and left hand grip springs differ in length 3 Remove the gear 3 1 E ringless Housing Employed in Machine Description 4 Remove the housing and bearin...

Page 576: ...r rollers Dislodge the shaft on one side of the four rubber rollers right as seen from the rear so that the vertical conveyor guide can be removed 6 Remove the elevation changeover guide 5 14 Replacin...

Page 577: ...the timing belt can be removed Loosen the two screws BR M4x8 that retain the tensioner to slide the tensioner as appropriate and then secure the tensioner in place 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension...

Page 578: ...positioning conveyor in place with two mounting screws BR M4x8 3 Connect the connectors CNC1 CNC2 CNSOLC1 4 Attach the two timing belt to the timing belt wheel 5 Put the tensioner back where it was L...

Page 579: ...arious Sensors 3 Using a cardboard or the like block the SC1 light path A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel 4 Remove the cardboard or the like that has blocked...

Page 580: ...M2460 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS MC 89 FR1H1112 EPS SC1 Pan head M3x10 x2 Connector Before side positioning conveyor FRONT Spacer with taper 2 1 Replacement 1 Disconnect the connector SC1 2 Remove...

Page 581: ...king Various Sensors 3 Using a cardboard or the like block the SC2 light path A message indicating that the sensor is CLOSE appears on the operation panel 4 Remove the cardboard or the like that has b...

Page 582: ...7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS MC 91 Replacement 1 Disconnect the connector SC2 2 Remove SC2 FR1H1113 EPS Before side positioning conveyor SC2 Pan head M3x10 x2 Connector FRONT Spacer 2 1 3 Install a new SC2 4 C...

Page 583: ...chine 2 Touch the U Utility button The screen switches to the U Utility mode 3 Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANI...

Page 584: ...SOLC1 shaft pin into the actuator of the guide driving shaft install the SOLC1 and bracket as a whole 6 Adjust SOLC1 Adjustment Adjustment Adjust the mounting position of the convergence path changeov...

Page 585: ...Conveyor 2 Disconnect the connector CNMC1 Because the MC1 connector is secured to the bracket pinch its latches to disconnect it 3 Remove MC1 Remove the MC1 while dislodging the timing belt that is lo...

Page 586: ...2 Remove the timing belt 3 Attach a new timing belt 4 Adjust the MC1 related timing belt Adjustment of MC1 related Timing Belt Adjustment of MC1 related Timing Belt 1 Loosen the screw that retains the...

Page 587: ...iming Belt 1 Loosen the screw that retains the tensioner 2 While checking the belt tension with a push pull gauge adjust the position of the tensioner Adjust the position of the tensioner until a prop...

Page 588: ...g roller assembly of the before side positioning conveyor 2 Pull out the cleaning roller assembly horizontally 3 Remove the bracket Loosen the four screws located on right and left sides of the cleani...

Page 589: ...rom the cleaning roller 6 Cleaning roller Slide bearing E ring Spur gear Sems M3x10 Spacer Slide bearing FR1H1442 EPS 7 Install the spur gear two spacers two slide bearings and E ring removed at step...

Page 590: ...emove the bearing and take out the rubber roller 6 For reinstallation reverse the removal steps NOTES When installing the rubber rollers observe the following precautions Ensure that the flat machined...

Page 591: ...ve the cover of the before side positioning conveyor 3 Loosen the single screw that retains the bracket 4 Remove the shock absorber attached guide plate A 5 Remove the cleaning roller assembly 6 Remov...

Page 592: ...2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS MC 101 8 Install the guide plate 9 Tighten the screw loosened at step 3 10 Reinstall the cover removed at step 2 11 Reinstall the before side positioning conveyor 6 1 Re...

Page 593: ...If it is peeled or frayed proceed to step 4 to replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is attached If it is not peeled or frayed proceed to step 14 FR1H1550 EPS Before side positioni...

Page 594: ...screw with the arm pushed against the flat ma chined surface Flat machined surface Arm Sems M3x10 FR1H1552 EPS 8 9 Adjust the mounting position of the convergence path changeover guide drive solenoid...

Page 595: ...or NOTES When installing the shafts position their grooves on the right hand side of the ma chine When installing the before side positioning retention guide assembly screw it down while retaining the...

Page 596: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MC 105 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS MC 105 BLANK PAGE...

Page 597: ...the floor If not the bolts of the adjustable feet would interfere with the cable cover When servicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If n...

Page 598: ...them should be pushed beneath the cable cover FRONT FRONT FRONT Cable Cable Cable FR1H1556 EPS Cable cover Cable cover 3 Remove the two screws that retain the bracket located on the upper portion of t...

Page 599: ...grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board 1 While pushing the stopper located on the front of the machine put the scanner unit...

Page 600: ...EPS CNZ5 CNZ4 CNZ2 CNZ1 Subscanning unit CN9 CN7 CN8 CNZ6 CNZ7 CNZ8 SCN08A board Bracket BR M4x8 x2 CNZ10 3 Using two screws secure the bracket located on the upper portion of the SCN08A board 4 Secu...

Page 601: ...2 Disconnect the connectors CND1 BCRCN1 CNMD1 3 3 Remove the five screws that retain the side positioning conveyor 4 Remove the side positioning conveyor by taking it out in a horizontal direction NOT...

Page 602: ...the side positioning conveyor While pressing the bracket of the side positioning conveyor against the block section of the subscanning unit and the reference side secure the side positioning conveyor...

Page 603: ...the side positioning mechanism HP sensor SD1 can be monitored 2 2 Checking Various Sensors 4 Shift the actuator of the side positioning mechanism by hand to dislocate it from the sensor A message ind...

Page 604: ...r 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 2 Remove the SD1 together with the bracket with CNSD1 attached 3 Disconnect the CNSD1 4 Remove the SD1 from the bracket 5 Attach a new SD1 to the bracket 6 Connect...

Page 605: ...r SD1 can be monitored 2 2 Checking Various Sensors 4 Rotate the cam of the grip mechanism to dislocate the actuator from the sensor A message indicating that the sensor is OPEN is displayed on the op...

Page 606: ...tate the cam of the grip mechanism to dislocate the actuator from SD2 3 Remove the SD2 together with the bracket with CNSD2 attached 4 Disconnect the CNSD2 5 Remove the SD2 from the bracket 6 Attach a...

Page 607: ...e version number Axx appears touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated When STEP 95 appears on screen any subsequent touch on the operation...

Page 608: ...moving and Reinstalling Side Positioning Conveyor Replacement 1 Remove the side positioning conveyor 8 1 Removing and Reinstalling Side Positioning Conveyor 2 Remove the SD3 and the spacer together wi...

Page 609: ...ut the cable tie 3 Disconnect CNMD1 4 Remove MD1 together with the bracket 5 Remove MD1 from the bracket 6 Remove the timing belt wheel from MD1 7 Install to a new MD1 the timing belt wheel that was r...

Page 610: ...onnect CNMD2 4 Remove MD2 together with the bracket 5 Remove MD2 from the bracket 6 Remove the timing belt wheel and stay from MD2 FR1H1781 EPS Side positioning conveyor BR M4x8 FRONT CNMD2 Pan head M...

Page 611: ...able tie 3 Disconnect CNMD3 4 Remove MD3 together with the bracket 5 Remove MD3 from the bracket 6 Remove the timing belt wheel from MD3 FR1H1782 EPS FRONT MD3 Pan head screw M3x10 x3 Timing belt whee...

Page 612: ...ositioning conveyor 8 1 Removing and Reinstalling Side Positioning Conveyor 2 Cut the four cable ties 3 Disconnect BCRCN2 4 Remove the barcode reader 5 Remove the four screws and take out the bracket...

Page 613: ...powered ON with any of the covers removed the photomultiplier will be damaged 1 Remove the following covers Lower right hand cover lower rear cover 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 2 Power ON the ma...

Page 614: ...S Triangular shaped cam Shaft 4 4 Shaft 3 E ring 2 Truss M3x6 Wire 4 Nut 5 Install the wire and shaft removed at step 4 to a new triangular shaped cam NOTE When installing the triangular shaped cam to...

Page 615: ...alling Side Positioning Conveyor 2 Move the side positioning mechanism to the right small size side to raise the stopper 3 Make sure that the distance from the guide plate to the tip of the stopper is...

Page 616: ...g from the stopper 3 Remove the four screws that retain the stopper 4 Remove the two slide bearings and two E rings 5 Remove the shaft 6 Remove the stopper Sems M3x6 x4 3 Stopper Shaft Slide bearing E...

Page 617: ...r MD2 3 Remove MD3 together with the bracket 8 7 Replacing IP Transport Motor MD3 4 Remove the single hex socket head bolt that retains the cam 5 Remove the single hex socket head bolt that retains th...

Page 618: ...heet or the like on the floor and place the side positioning conveyor down on the sheet with its side down 3 Measure the distance A of the timing belt 4 With a load of 500 50 g applied to the timing b...

Page 619: ...Conveyor 2 Remove MD1 together with the bracket 8 5 Replacing Side Positioning Motor MD1 3 Remove the retainer that retains the timing belt 4 Remove the timing belt T O P Timing belt 4 FR1H1791 EPS R...

Page 620: ...hile checking the tension of the belt by use of a push pull gauge adjust the position of the tension roller Screw down the tension roller in place where an appropriate tension is attained The tension...

Page 621: ...ning conveyor 8 1 Removing and Reinstalling Side Positioning Conveyor 2 Remove the bearing grip spring housing belt wheel and timing belt wheel for the rubber roller to be removed 3 Replace the six si...

Page 622: ...plates 3 Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is attached 4 Reinstall the shock absorber attached gui...

Page 623: ...it is desired to adjust with greater accuracy perform 6 Fine Adjustment of Read Width and Read Start Position After fine adjustment of read width and read start position perform 5 Check on Adjustment...

Page 624: ...e displayed value on your notepad and touch the setup value area 4 Set the image trimming TE to 0 CAUTION If the image trimming is changed by entering value 0 be sure to revert the trimming back to it...

Page 625: ...nit FRONT FR1H1101 EPS Scanning optics unit 4 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 8 DATA MANAGEMENT and 3 SAVE FORMAT DATA in sequence The read width adjustment value so adjusted is saved in the hard disk 4 Inpu...

Page 626: ...tivate M Utility Activating and Exiting M Utility 7 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 FORMAT and 2 PIXEL ADJUST in sequence 8 Enter the correction value determined in step 5 The read width is adjusted If the...

Page 627: ...less in actual size on the IP SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE The white blank portions can be adjusted by setting the image trimming 5 Quit the adjustment of the read width and read start position Only if anything...

Page 628: ...ative to the image frame To decrement the current read start position by N pixels 0 N 999 Value of N The image is shifted leftward relative to the image frame SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE The MP invalid pixel v...

Page 629: ...ure Stopwatch Used to check the elapsed time after uniform exposure ULP or LPII 1 Initial Setting for Shading Correction Data Recording 1 Activate M Utility 9 1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read...

Page 630: ...e IP in primary erasure mode 10 minutes after its uniform exposure 1 Change the processing mode to Primary Erasure While in Routine Mode touch the CHANGE key to select Primary Erasure 2 Set in the mac...

Page 631: ...Utility 9 1 Adjusting Read Start Position and Read Width Activating and Exiting M Utility 2 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 7 SHADING SENSITIVITY and 2 CALCULATION in sequence 3 Select any of menu items 1 th...

Page 632: ...phery of the IP should be measured in advance and the difference between them should then be calculated to determine the correction dosage value 2 Determine the correction dosage value Write down the...

Page 633: ...5 Checks on Correction Results again 1 Uniformly expose a 14 x 14 35cm x 35cm or 14 x 17 35cm x 43cm IP at 0 5 to 9 99 mR 2 Perform recording under SENSITIVITY of the IDT s Test Menu and generate imag...

Page 634: ...e not to let any screw drop into the subscanning unit Removal 1 Pull out the scanner unit 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 2 Write down on your notepad the read width adjustment value indicat...

Page 635: ...Unit Replacement 1 Reinstall all the covers 2 Power ON the machine Make sure that the machine starts up normally 3 Adjust the read start position and read width 9 1 Adjusting Read Start Position and R...

Page 636: ...IONS Do not disconnect the connectors CN2 and 3 from the LDD08A board If they are discon nected the LD protection is disabled so that the LD may fail Do not touch the patterns and ICs of the LDD08A bo...

Page 637: ...ner Unit 6 Make sure that connector CN1 of the SCN08A board is locked If not securely connect the connector to lock it in place CAUTION When connecting CN1 use care not to touch the C33 and C94 capaci...

Page 638: ...button The screen switches to the U Utility mode 10 Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 11 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 3 LASER and 2 ON...

Page 639: ...performing the procedures with the top cover removed wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around Use care to avoid shock to the scanning optics unit Do not remove the LD assembly cover becaus...

Page 640: ...reverse the removal steps NOTE When installing the LD assembly align the LD assembly against the three positioning brackets for proper positioning LD assembly Top view Scanning optics unit Positioning...

Page 641: ...ON the machine Make sure that the machine starts up normally If the machine does not start up normally take the following steps to perform self diagnostics of Scanner Utility 1 Touch the U Utility bu...

Page 642: ...to the scanning optics unit Do not remove the LD assembly cover because the LD may be damaged by static electricity Never touch the optical lens and mirror When servicing any printed circuit board be...

Page 643: ...and the connector CN3 on the SCN08A board are locked securely 5 Verify that the no fuse breaker NFB5 of the SCN08A board is in its shorted condition button depressed Push the NFB5 button several times...

Page 644: ...olygon and back ON again If D13 is lit again the polygonal mirror assembly is normal If it is not lit second time it is conceivable that the polygonal mirror assembly may be faulty So replace the poly...

Page 645: ...e scanning optics unit 9 3 Removing and Reinstalling Scanning Optics Unit Removal 4 Remove the clamp 5 Cut the cable tie that retains the filter and then remove the filter 6 Replace the polygon driver...

Page 646: ...Assembly Replacement below Checks after Polygonal Mirror Assembly Replacement 1 Turn ON the high voltage switch S1 of the SCN08A board 2 Reinstall all the covers 3 Power ON the machine Make sure that...

Page 647: ...emoved wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around When servicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built...

Page 648: ...n Scanner Unit 14 Make sure that the connector CN2 of the SCN08A board is locked If not securely connect the connector to lock it in place 15 Make sure that the no fuse breakers NFB6 NFB7 NFB9 NFB10 o...

Page 649: ...ect 5 SCANNER UTILITY 3 LASER and 2 ON in sequence 20 Select 5 SCANNER UTILITY 2 POLYGON and 2 ON in sequence 21 Check if D14 of the SCN08A board is lit blinking quickly If it is lit set LASER and POL...

Page 650: ...ers removed the photomultiplier will be damaged 1 Power OFF the machine 2 Pull out the scanner unit 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 3 Disconnect the connector CN1 of the LDD08A board 4 Remov...

Page 651: ...mbly align the SYN08A assembly against the reference face of the mounting bracket for proper positioning The spacer that was attached before replacement should be used for reinstallation Fit the cable...

Page 652: ...ng abnormal with scanner control Uniformly expose IPs of each size at about 1 mR Then check the film image recorded under SENSITIVITY from the Test Menu for scanner control failures such as format mis...

Page 653: ...e board Checks CAUTION Before removing the covers be sure to turn OFF the high voltage switch If the machine is powered ON with any of the covers removed the photomultiplier will be damaged 1 Power OF...

Page 654: ...is outside the above reference value range check the connec tor cables and power supply unit If there is nothing abnormal with the connector cables and power supply unit replace the SCN board S1 SCN0...

Page 655: ...use breaker of the new SCN08A board is in its shorted condi tion Push the no fuse breaker button several times to put the button in its depressed condition NOTE With board version J or later the no fu...

Page 656: ...collecting guide may be soiled or dam aged Never touch the light receiving face of the light collecting guide even when you are wearing gloves Carefully handle the light collecting guide to avoid dam...

Page 657: ...g guide assembly down onto a soft sheet or the like using care not to damage it CAUTIONS Wear gloves when handling the light collecting guide assembly If it is handled with bare hands the light collec...

Page 658: ...bly align the protrusions located at both ends of the light receiving face of the light collecting guide assembly against the reference plane in the subscanning direction and the front protrusion agai...

Page 659: ...n is pushed the arm itself may be deformed 3 Secure the light collecting guide assembly retaining bracket with the brace CAUTION If the light collecting guide assembly leaves its fixed position i e po...

Page 660: ...If anything abnormal is found remove the single screw that retains the light collecting guide retaining bracket While holding the light collecting guide push in the PMT08A board assembly and adjust t...

Page 661: ...ght collecting guide in the reverse order of removal If there is any soil Clean the light collecting guide with an ethanol moistened lens cleaner Cleaning If there is any scratch about 0 8mm in width...

Page 662: ...are hands the light collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged Wear a mask to prevent saliva from sputtering around on the light collecting guide 5 Reinstall the light collecting guide assembl...

Page 663: ...light collecting guide with the sheets moistened with ethanol CAUTIONS Wipe the light collecting guide in one direction at a constant rate Do not wipe the photomultiplier bonding surface If the lens c...

Page 664: ...adjust the position of the sockets of the PMT08A board and light collecting guide as appropriate CAUTIONS Wear gloves when handling the light collecting guide assembly If it is handled with bare hand...

Page 665: ...pply sections of the PMT08A board If any of the voltages measured is out of spec as a result of the checks on the log amp and high voltage power supply sections of the PMT08A board then replace the PM...

Page 666: ...ssembly 5 Power ON the machine 6 Touch the U Utility button The screen switches to the U Utility mode 7 Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence M Utility...

Page 667: ...CAUTION After checks be sure to select ROUTINE under VIRTUAL IMAGE of SCANNER UTILITY to reset the scanner back to its initial condition If it is not reset to its initial condition an image with lowe...

Page 668: ...The high voltage is set to 250 V 10 With the terminals HV135 PGND touched by the probes of the tester turn ON the high voltage switch S1 of the SCN08A board CAUTION When making voltage measurements o...

Page 669: ...e three spacers and nut 4 Remove the PMT08A board 5 Install a new PMT08A board in reverse order of removal NOTES Do not forget to tighten the PMT08A board retaining nut If the nut is left loose abnorm...

Page 670: ...upstream command value is connected to GND Short pin setting Make sure that the short pin TN1 is set as follows SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE For TN1 the following steps may be taken to check its condition 1 Sta...

Page 671: ...ight collecting mirror Removal 1 Remove the light collecting guide assembly 10 2 Servicing Light Collecting Guide 2 Remove the after reading conveyor 11 1 Removing and Reinstalling After Reading Conve...

Page 672: ...ght collecting mirror to prevent it from dropping into a gap 9 Remove the two screws that retain the light collecting mirror in place 10 Remove the light collecting mirror Grasp the take out screws an...

Page 673: ...se order of removal 5 Install the light collecting guide assembly 10 2 Servicing Light Collecting Guide 6 Reinstall the after reading conveyor 11 1 Removing and Reinstalling After Reading Conveyor Che...

Page 674: ...such as format misalignment and shading which may cause diagnostic problems If anything abnormal is found make the following adjustments 4 Perform shading sensitivity correction 9 2 Shading Sensitivit...

Page 675: ...ecting Guide 5 Set the scanner unit in position 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 6 Make sure that the connector CN4 of the SCN08A board has been locked 7 Make sure that the no fuse breaker NF...

Page 676: ...he scanner unit 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 2 Remove the light collecting guide assembly 10 2 Servicing Light Collecting Guide 3 Remove the scanning optics unit 9 3 Removing and Reinstal...

Page 677: ...EN CLOSE status of SZ2 Replacement 1 Pull out the scanner unit 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 2 Remove the light collecting guide assembly 10 2 Servicing Light Collecting Guide 3 Remove the...

Page 678: ...CLOSE status of SZ3 Replacement 1 Pull out the scanner unit 7 Pulling Out and Pushing In Scanner Unit 2 Remove the light collecting guide assembly 10 2 Servicing Light Collecting Guide 3 Remove the si...

Page 679: ...ility is activated 5 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 2 ACTUATOR in sequence 6 Select 2 DRIVE A list of actuator Nos is displayed 7 Type in the number of MZ1 FFM 8 Set up an operation parameter as inst...

Page 680: ...MZ1 FR1H1812 EPS MZ1 BR M4x8 x5 Kapton belt Spring Subscanning unit Left hand side transparent cover BR M4x8 x2 1 2 CN1 2 3 3 2 4 5 Install a new MZ1 by reversing the removal steps NOTE When installin...

Page 681: ...Z2 MZ2 4 Remove the right hand side transparent cover 5 Remove the SZ2 attached bracket as a whole 6 Remove the ring and cam from the MZ2 shaft 7 Remove MZ2 8 Reverse the removal steps to reinstall a...

Page 682: ...he right hand side transparent cover 5 Remove the MZ3 attached bracket as a whole 6 Remove the ring and cam from the MZ3 shaft 7 Remove MZ3 FR1H1021 EPS Cam Bracket BR M4x8 x4 5 Right hand side transp...

Page 683: ...hand side cover 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 2 Remove the transparent cover located on the right hand side Using a blower remove dust deposited on the transparent cover 3 While rotating the dri...

Page 684: ...3 Remove the tensioner spring located on the right hand side 4 Replace the SUS belt or rubber belt To remove the rubber belt rotate the drive shaft while keeping the center of the belt tense and take...

Page 685: ...ight hand side 4 Replace the SUS belt 5 Replace the tensioner FR1H1813 EPS Spring Tensioner SUS belt Right hand side transparent cover BR M4x8 x2 Drive shaft E ring Subscanning unit 5 4 3 2 6 For rein...

Page 686: ...emoving and Reinstalling Covers 2 Remove the transparent cover located on the left hand side Using a blower remove dust deposited on the transparent cover 3 Check the Kapton belt tensioner and flywhee...

Page 687: ...wheel to ensure that the belt does not come off the pulley Replacement of Kapton belt 1 Remove the following covers Lower front cover lower left hand side cover 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 2 Re...

Page 688: ...blower remove dust deposited on the transparent cover 3 Remove the spring 4 Remove the Kapton belt 5 Replace the tensioner FRONT FR1H1816 EPS E ring Kapton belt Spring Tensioner Subscanning unit Left...

Page 689: ...n wrench or so forth into the hole of the shaft located inside the side plate to secure it in place and remove the nut that retains the flywheel 8 Replace the flywheel Left hand side transparent cover...

Page 690: ...r 10 4 Servicing Light Collecting Mirror 4 Lift up the brace that retains the rubber roller and slide it to a position that facilitates removal of the rubber roller 5 Remove the rubber roller from the...

Page 691: ...re that the brace is located between the E ring and cap NOTE If the spring that should be attached to the lower portion of the brace has been dislo cated be sure to reattach the spring to the lower po...

Page 692: ...Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit 7 Take out the grip arm from the subscanning unit 8 Remove the bearing and shaft from the grip arm Bearing Shaft FR1H1544 EPS Grip arm Hex socket head setscr...

Page 693: ...x2 4 Grip arm 3 10 15 Replacing Guide Plate of Subscanning Unit 1 Remove the rubber roller located above the subscanning unit 10 13 Replacing Rubber Roller Located Above Subscanning Unit 2 Remove the...

Page 694: ...the guide plate in the arrow directions illustrated below to position it as appro priate Top view Subscanning unit guide plate F R O N T FR1H1530 EPS BR M4x8 x3 BR M4x12 Spacer After installing the s...

Page 695: ...t 10 11 Checking and Replacing SUS Belt Rubber Belt Tensioner 3 Remove the two respective screws that retain the bearings of the lower rubber rollers 4 Pull out the two lower rubber rollers 5 Remove t...

Page 696: ...he shock absorbing rubber 4 Reinstall the shock absorbing rubber in reverse order of removal 5 Make adjustment after replacement of the shock absorbing rubber Adjustment On the side positioning convey...

Page 697: ...sened 2 Adjust the position of the subscanning unit so that its distances from the tray are as indicated by adjustment values A B and C shown below 3 Tighten the screws that were loosened at step 1 4...

Page 698: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MC 207 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS MC 207 BLANK PAGE...

Page 699: ...overs that should be removed prior to checks and replacement have been removed 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 11 1 Removing and Reinstalling After Reading Conveyor Remove the after reading conveyo...

Page 700: ...BR M4x8 x5 4 New type Removal 1 Remove the light collecting guide assembly 10 2 Servicing Light Collecting Guide 2 Disconnect the connectors CNSE1 CNME1 CNME2 3 Remove the five screws four screws for...

Page 701: ...two bumps on the right hand side and one of the two bumps on the left hand side are aligned against the block sections of the subscanning unit SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE Both of the two bumps on the right ha...

Page 702: ...ading conveyor 4 BR M4x8 x2 FR1H1565 EPS After reading conveyor FRONT Bracket Bracket 4 BR M4x8 If the bumps are detached from the block section of the subscanning unit loosen the three screws and rep...

Page 703: ...while pressing the bracket of the after reading conveyor against the block section of the subscanning unit and reference side 2 Connect the connectors CNSE1 CNME1 CNME2 FRONT Bracket After reading con...

Page 704: ...ty is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 5 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor Nos is displayed 6 Type in the number of SE1 The machine is now in the sensor monitoring enab...

Page 705: ...ector SE1 2 Remove the bracket 3 Remove SE1 from the bracket 4 Install a new SE1 3 5 Sensors Not Requiring Adjustment of Its Mounting Position in Machine Description 5 Connect the connector SE1 6 Atta...

Page 706: ...ner unit 1 Remove the cable clamp 2 Disconnect the connector CNME1 3 Remove ME1 Remove the two screws that retain the front side of the ME1 Also remove the single screw that retains the stay on the in...

Page 707: ...replaced with the scanner unit pulled out 1 Remove the after reading conveyor 11 1 Removing and Reinstalling After Reading Conveyor 2 Disconnect the connector CNME2 3 Remove ME2 4 Remove the timing b...

Page 708: ...veyor 2 Remove the shock absorber attached guide plate 3 Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is atta...

Page 709: ...should be removed prior to checks and replacement have been removed 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 12 1 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Lamp Assembly Removal 1 Disconnect the connectors ACOUT1...

Page 710: ...rasure lamp may be broken so you may get injured SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE When installing the erasure lamp assembly align the positioning pin located on the right hand side of the inlet into the hole of the...

Page 711: ...r until the timing belt can be removed Loosen the one retaining screw and slide the tensioner as appropriate and then tighten the screw 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Descri...

Page 712: ...where it was Loosen the single screw that retains the tensioner Flick the timing belt several times to ensure that it snugly fits onto the belt wheel and then tighten the screw on the tensioner in pla...

Page 713: ...of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 5 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor Nos is displayed 6 Type in the number of the after...

Page 714: ...31 99 FM2460 MC 223 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS Replacement 1 Disconnect the connector SF1 2 Remove SF1 3 Install a new SF1 4 Connect the connector SF1 5 Check SF1 Checks Erasure conveyor Connector SF...

Page 715: ...ion panel in sequence M Utility is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 5 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor Nos is displayed 6 Type in the number of the changeover IP senso...

Page 716: ...31 99 FM2460 MC 225 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS Replacement 1 Remove SF2 2 Disconnect the connector SF2 3 Install a new SF2 4 Connect the connector SF2 5 Check SF2 Checks Erasure conveyor FR1H1262 EPS...

Page 717: ...the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 5 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 6 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor Nos is displayed 7 Type in the number of the load stan...

Page 718: ...31 99 FM2460 MC 227 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS Replacement 1 Disconnect the connector SF3 2 Remove SF3 3 Install a new SF3 4 Connect the connector SF3 5 Check SF3 Checks Erasure conveyor FR1H1264 EPS...

Page 719: ...and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 5 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY and 3 SENSOR in sequence 6 Select 2 MONITOR A list of sensor Nos is displayed 7 Type in...

Page 720: ...ie 3 2 5 1 4 12 Power OFF the machine 13 Install the SF4 attached bracket as a whole Replacement 1 Disconnect the connector SF4 2 Remove the SF4 attached bracket as a whole 3 Cut the cable tie 4 Disco...

Page 721: ...ove the erasure conveyor 12 2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor 2 Cut the cable tie 3 Disconnect the connector CNMF1 4 Remove the connector from the side plate Because the connector porti...

Page 722: ...3 Remove the five erasure lamps 4 Wipe the white reflection face within the erasure lamp assembly and the white reflec tion face behind the bracket with a dry cloth 5 Install five new erasure lamps 6...

Page 723: ...t of TSW1 1 Remove the erasure lamp assembly 12 2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor 2 Remove the bracket of the erasure lamp assembly 3 Remove the FAST ON terminals TSW1COM TSW1NO 4 Replace T...

Page 724: ...2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor 2 Remove the bracket 3 Remove the five erasure lamps 4 Remove the leaf spring 5 Remove the FAST ON terminals TSW2COM TSW2NO 6 Remove TSW2 7 For reinstallat...

Page 725: ...mp assembly 12 2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor 3 Remove the bracket 4 Remove the cable clamp 5 Disconnect the connector CNFANF1 6 Remove the four screws that retain the fan assembly 7 Rep...

Page 726: ...r Filter 1 Power OFF the machine 2 Remove the lower front cover and lower right hand side cover 3 Remove the air filter 4 Attach a new air filter Attach the air filter so as to cover the Velcro tape l...

Page 727: ...d during checks replace or adjust the erasure unit IP convey ance timing belt 1 Power OFF the machine 2 Remove the erasure conveyor 12 2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor 3 Measure the te...

Page 728: ...onveyor 12 2 Removal and Reinstallation of Erasure Conveyor 2 Remove MF1 12 7 Replacing IP Transport Motor MF1 3 Remove the timing belt 4 Attach a new erasure unit IP conveyance timing belt 5 Adjust t...

Page 729: ...nt 1 Measure the tension value for the timing belt With a load of 300 50g applied the deflection should be 11 1mm 2 Shift the tensioner position to adjust the tension of the timing belt until the spec...

Page 730: ...g Erasure Conveyor 2 Remove the grip spring for the rubber roller to be replaced 3 Remove the drive gear 3 1 E ringless Housing Employed in Machine Description 4 Remove the simple bearing 3 3 Simple B...

Page 731: ...d upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 4 Select 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 2 ACTUATOR and 2 DRIVE in sequence A list of actuator Nos is displayed 5 Select 7 SOLF1 Th...

Page 732: ...6 CONTENTS Replacement After replacement be sure to check 1 Remove the spring 2 Disconnect the connector CNSOLF1 3 Remove the changeover guide drive solenoid assembly SOLF1 FR1H1257 EPS Erasure convey...

Page 733: ...the changeover guide drive solenoid assembly to the left and above by sliding it along the guide When the arm begins to leave the stopper support return the changeover guide drive solenoid assembly u...

Page 734: ...er on Before Side Positioning Conveyor Side 1 Remove the erasure conveyor 12 2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor 2 Remove the shock absorber attached guide plate 3 Check if the shock absorber...

Page 735: ...ssembly NOTE When removing the lamp house assembly use care not to damage the shock absorber 5 Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole filter to...

Page 736: ...IR341 Service Manual MC 245 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MC 245 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS 8 Reinstall the lamp assembly 9 Attach the bracket removed at step 2 10 Attach the grip spring removed at step...

Page 737: ...sure Conveyor 1 Remove the erasure conveyor 12 2 Removing and Reinstalling Erasure Conveyor 2 Disconnect the connector CNSF4 3 Remove SF4 together with the bracket 4 Disconnect the connector CNSF2 5 R...

Page 738: ...d If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is attached FR1H1627 EPS Erasure conveyor FRONT Shock absorber attached guide plate Sems M3x6 x4 6 7 8 Reinstall t...

Page 739: ...place the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is attached If it is not peeled or frayed reinstall the guide plate in reverse order of removal FRONT Erasure conveyor Guide plate BR M3x6 x4 Sh...

Page 740: ...ring and slide bearing removed at step 9 to a new shock ab sorber attached branch path changeover guide 11 Fit the spring pin into the U shaped groove of the arm 12 Reinstall the branch path changeove...

Page 741: ...gether with the connector which was removed at step 6 16 Attach the spring removed at step 4 17 Attach the guide plate removed at step 2 Spring pin Arm End surface of square hole Bearing Changeover gu...

Page 742: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MC 251 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MC 251 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 743: ...wer OFF the machine 2 Disconnect the connectors AC OUT1 2 DCOUT1 7 TB1 2 CN1 5 3 Remove the four screws that retain the power supply unit 4 Pull out the power supply unit horizontally 5 Install a new...

Page 744: ...fan 24V DCOUT5 F6 250V 2A For SCN08A 24V DCOUT6 F7 250V 5A For SCN08A 15V DCOUT6 F8 250V 5A For SCN08A 15V DCOUT6 F9 250V 4A For DRV08A 24V DCOUT3 F10 250V 4A For DRV08A 24V DCOUT3 F11 250V 4A For DR...

Page 745: ...2 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS MC 254 3 Replace the fuse 4 Attach the cover of the power supply unit 5 Reinstall the power supply unit F5 F13 F4 F1 F3 F2 F8 F7 F12 F11 F10 F9 F6 FR1H1524 EPS Top view ON OF...

Page 746: ...enance Utility Volume Removal 1 Disconnect the connectors CNJ1 2 2 Loosen the two screws that retain the bracket 3 Slide the HDD together with the bracket toward yourself and take it out 4 Remove the...

Page 747: ...sheet to the parts mounted surface of the HDD NOTE Make sure that the sheet does not cover any of the bumps x4 on the HDD CAUTION Do not attach the light blue film face of the sheet to the parts mount...

Page 748: ...NOTES When attaching the sheet retaining plate align the sheet retaining plate to the edge of the sheet Align the sheet retaining plate to the side of the HDD Align the sheet retaining plate to the e...

Page 749: ...n inserting the HDD into the bracket use care to avoid contact between the adhesive coated surface of the sheet and the bracket Secure the HDD in place such that the sheet retaining plate of the HDD i...

Page 750: ...1 Service Manual MC 255 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MC 255 4 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS 6 Install the HDD together with the bracket 7 Connect the connectors CNJ1 2 8 Format the HDD 9 Install the so...

Page 751: ...FRONT FR1H6078 EPS HDD bottom For 850S0121 28 26 TERM PWR SCSI TERM TRGT INIT 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 34 32 30 27 25 23 21 19 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 33 31 29 1 13 11 9 7 5 3 1 19 17 15 14 12 10...

Page 752: ...overs Lower front cover upper right hand side cover upper left hand side cover upper front cover 3 Removing and Reinstalling Covers 2 Disconnect the connectors CN1 2 from the VOL08A board CNJ1 2 from...

Page 753: ...the FDD is at initial setting 7 Reinstall the FDD together with the bracket 8 Connect the connectors CN1 2 from the VOL08A board CNJ1 2 from the FDD CN1 CNJ2 CNJ1 FDD Bracket BR M4x8 x4 CN2 Short plug...

Page 754: ...to remove it If it is allowed to stay a risk of fire or electric shock will be caused Remove the upper left hand side cover upper right hand side cover and front cover 1 Remove the power switch cover...

Page 755: ...RT CN1 through CN4 5 Remove the monitor together with the bracket 6 Separate the two mounting brackets from the monitor CRT CN3 PNL CN3 CRT CN2 CRT CN1 CRT CN4 FR1H4023 EPS 4 4 4 4 4 FR1H4021 EPS FRON...

Page 756: ...t cloth moistened with a neutral detergent solution Sufficiently wring the cloth before wiping the monitor screen NOTE Do not use alcohol Alcohol is strongly permeative so that if there is any small s...

Page 757: ...P and wait until it is completely dry 4 Put the IP into the cassette with its fluorescent surface down IP Conveyance Check 1 Power ON the machine 2 Touch the U Utility button The screen switches to th...

Page 758: ...uch the U Utility button The screen switches to U Utility 12 Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 13 Select 3 TEST MODE and 1 RO...

Page 759: ...W 120 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Adjustable wrench 150mm FR1H1705 EPS Qty 1 Type N 25 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Nippers 150mm FR1H1706 EPS Qty 1 Type P 22 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Long nose pliers...

Page 760: ...s Jeweler s screwdriver set FR1H1717 EPS Qty 1 Type M41 5 5 Manufacturer KTC Remarks Combination box open end wrench 5 5mm FR1H1718 EPS Qty 1 Type M41 7 Manufacturer KTC Remarks Combination box open e...

Page 761: ...Crimp pliers FR1H1726 EPS Qty 1 Type P 95 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Wire stripper FR1H1727 EPS Qty 1 Type Manufacturer Any commercially available one Remarks Scissors FR1H1728 EPS Qty 1 Type Manufact...

Page 762: ...anufacturer HAKKO Remarks Solder FR1H1735 EPS Qty 1 Type US140 Manufacturer EDSYN Remarks Desoldering tool with a vacuum attachment FR1H1736 EPS Qty 1 Type 999 1 Manufacturer HAKKO Remarks Adapter plu...

Page 763: ...at have not been in spected and calibrated proper performance of the machine could not be guaranteed Qty 1 Type Manufacturer Remarks Ethanol FR1H1742 EPS Kim Wipe dustless paper Qty 1 Type S 200 Manuf...

Page 764: ...3M Remarks FR1H1745 EPS Qty 50 Type PLT2M Manufacturer KITAGAWA KOGYO Remarks Cable tie FR1H1748 EPS Qty 50 Type PLT1M Manufacturer KITAGAWA KOGYO Remarks Cable tie FR1H1746 EPS Qty 50 Type PLT1 5S M...

Page 765: ...at are not needed normally but improve ease of servicing when available Qty 1 Type TC 24 Manufacturer 3M Remarks IC clip FR1H1753 EPS Qty 1 Type TC 16 Manufacturer 3M Remarks IC clip FR1H1752 EPS Qty...

Page 766: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MC 271 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MC 271 12 13 14 15 11 16 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 767: ...ing Boards and HDD 16 1 Board Arrangement Diagram The boards and HDD in the machine are laid out as illustrated below LDD08A LED08B SCN08A SYN08A SNS08A BCR08A HDD MTH08A CPU90F LAN90B DMC08A or HCP08...

Page 768: ...FB6 CN3 CN1 CN4 CN2 CN30 NFB5 NFB4 CN25 CN26 NFB1 CN23 CN18 CN17 CN22 FR1H1350 EPS MTH08A board CN27 How to Check Fuse For no fuse breaker NFB The no fuse breakers NFB1 NFB6 are to be shorted ON at fa...

Page 769: ...ctric parts mounted on the board If the lithium cell is drained replace the board as a whole The old board replaced should be sent back to the Parts Center factory If the cell is replaced improperly i...

Page 770: ...n style CROSS STRAIGHT changeover STRAIGHT position Installation style dependent S6 Effects IDT communication line signal level RS 422 RS 232C changeover RS 422 position Installation style dependent S...

Page 771: ...inted circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board Settin...

Page 772: ...rcuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board Setting IMG08A...

Page 773: ...rd CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric p...

Page 774: ...rd CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric p...

Page 775: ...circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board Setting DMC0...

Page 776: ...circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board Setting HCP0...

Page 777: ...should be updated to A09 or later Earlier software versions do not support a newer LSI discontinuation supported on the daughter board ETH90F board of the CPU90F board Setting CPU90F Board Make sure...

Page 778: ...the no fuse breaker NFB is replaced with the fuse 16 14 How to Check the Fuse on the Board 16 10a LAN90B Board CAUTION When servicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband...

Page 779: ...8 CN4 CN9 CN11 CN16 CN19 CN21 CN25 NFB12 CN26 CN8 CN10 CN14 CN2 CN3 CN20 How to Check Fuse For no fuse breaker NFB The no fuse breakers NFB12 are to be shorted ON at factory prior to shipment and must...

Page 780: ...are to be shorted ON at factory prior to shipment and must be so at installation However since they may unexpectedly turn OFF due to vibration during transit press all the no fuse breaker buttons two...

Page 781: ...ecking and Replacing Polygo nal Mirror Assembly SCN08A board 10 1 Checking and Replacing SCN08A Board PMT08A board 10 3 Checking and Replacing PMT08A Board No setup procedures need be performed for th...

Page 782: ...ble to accurately determine whether the fuse has been blown or not while the board is installed in the machine However if the resistance value across the leads of the fuse while the board is installed...

Page 783: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Maintenance Utility MU...

Page 784: ...31 99 04 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages FM2460 11 20 99 05 Corrections FM2638 MU 12 14 171 04 20 2001 06 Software update FM3006 MU 19 33 41 41 1 41 4 42 47 56 57 61 66 67 70 73...

Page 785: ...ttings of the machine Because reading and writing of files that can be edited on a personal computer PC is supported configuration setting may be performed on a PC running Windows 95 Setup can be done...

Page 786: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 3 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MU 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 1 8 10 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 787: ...e Utility mode End process mode Maintenance utility mode Active OS boot mode Inactive User operation User IDT operation Service engineer operation Transition caused by human intervention No human inte...

Page 788: ...ce utility mode Active OS boot mode Inactive User operation User IDT operation Service engineer operation Transition caused by human intervention No human intervention required Automatic transition Po...

Page 789: ...the upper left hand corner of the operation panel and then within two seconds touch the upper right hand corner M Utility starts When the screen reads STEP95 the operation panel is inoperative and doe...

Page 790: ...2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING M Utility screen Deleting images waiting for pr...

Page 791: ...NTENTS MU 8 When an error screen is displayed Touch the upper left hand corner of the operation panel and then within two seconds touch the upper right hand corner FR1B1137 EPS Call maintenance person...

Page 792: ...the machine after you exit M Utility NOTE If M Utility is entered during the initialization sequence 0 QUIT does not appear Thus after quitting M Utility the machine should be reset 1 While the M Uti...

Page 793: ...SENSOR and 2 MONITOR in sequence The sensor list menu appears 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY...

Page 794: ...menu execu tion operation Selecting STOP When you select STOP the actuator or motor operation DRIVE ends 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER...

Page 795: ...s of virtual keyboards Correcting a value entry You can correct a value entry with the DEL or BS key DEL key Each time you touch this key it erases the character located above the cursor BS key Each t...

Page 796: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 13 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 MU 13 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 797: ...ays the number of occurrences in four digits for those errors 0 QUIT 1 ERROR Displays serious errors only 2 WARNING Displays warning errors only 3 BOTH Displays all errors 0 QUIT 1 ERROR Displays seri...

Page 798: ...setup information for network connection and communication 7 HOSTS ADDRESS Sets an address of network connection 8 DISTRIBUTION Sets a destination of network connection 10 NETMASKS Sets a subnet mask...

Page 799: ...ays the Ethernet MAC addresses of the CPU90E and CPU90F 2 PING Executes ping by designating the LANC used CPU90E or CPU90F and the host name of its connection designation or IP address 3 CPU90F DMA Th...

Page 800: ...is done in 8 DATA MANAGEMENT 9 2 Shading Sensitivity Correction in Checks Replacement and Adjustment Volume 0 QUIT 1 REC MODE Makes the shading correction data recordable 2 CALCULATION Calculates the...

Page 801: ...l generation mode to revert back to the initial state It should always be performed after the checks are completed in the virtual image signal generation mode 3 SHADING POLYGON CORRECTION It is set to...

Page 802: ...on the IP removal mechanism Displays a message if any abnormality is encountered 0 QUIT 1 ARM HOME POSITION 2 FEED LOAD 3 SIDE POSITIONING GRIP Performs operation tests on the side positioning conveya...

Page 803: ...ch setup file from the floppy disk to the hard disk 0 QUIT 1 SCANNER DATA Reads the scanner setup files from a floppy disk to the hard disk 2 CONFIGURATION DATA Reads setup files IRSET CFG FILFMT CFG...

Page 804: ...s be sure to turn OFF the high voltage switch 10 MENU SETTING Sets various parameters for the exposure menu 0 QUIT 1 CLEAR FR1H4032 EPS NOTE Numerals in brackets denote a relevant chapter in this manu...

Page 805: ...structure is the same as in normal operation except some of the menus are omitted For your reference the upper menu hierarchy is shown below Menu Hierarchy in Initialization Sequence or in Serious Er...

Page 806: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 23 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 MU 23 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 807: ...g All Error Messages All error messages generated are displayed Error messages are presented in reverse chronological order The display content includes the date and time of an error code generated an...

Page 808: ...E COUNT 081D 1998 04 16 14 36 0012 1722 1998 04 16 10 12 0006 23E6 1998 04 16 09 58 0213 0 END 1 NEXT 2 BEFORE DEFAULT 1 Selection of error level Select one of the following error levels to display th...

Page 809: ...or logs are cleared 1 Select 2 CLEAR and 1 ERROR LOG in sequence The following message appears ARE YOU SURE TO CLEAR ALL ERROR LOGS 1 YES 2 NO DEFAULT 2 2 Select 1 YES The following message appears wi...

Page 810: ...The following message appears PLEASE SET A FD ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE ERROR LOGS TO THE FD 1 YES 2 NO DEFAULT 2 CAUTION While a file is being saved never power OFF the machine or press the FD eject butto...

Page 811: ...he hard disk 1 Select 4 SAVE TO HD and 1 ERROR LOG in sequence The following message appears ARE YOU SURE TO SAVE ERROR LOGS TO THE HD 1 YES 2 NO DEFAULT 2 CAUTION While a file is being saved never po...

Page 812: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 29 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 MU 29 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 813: ...nge the setup in the configuration file 1 SYSTEM IRSET CFG Define overall setup information regarding the machine 3 REMOTE SWITCH RMT_SW CFG Remote switch ON OFF setting for the intelligent hub 2 PRIN...

Page 814: ...3 IP Address CPU90E Length 15 E F A B C 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 DEL SAVE sb0 SYSTEM ETC IRSET CFG CANCEL BS ENT Caps FR1B1208 EPS 7 1 Editing Various Setup Files A specific editing method is described below...

Page 815: ...or is deleted SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE If it is difficult to undo the editing with the DEL or BS key touch the CANCEL key and repeat from step 1 all over again 4 Press the SAVE key The edited contents are s...

Page 816: ...Padding method CSL Type 28 EXAM_PADDING Examination No Padding method CSL Type 27 EXAM_LENGTH Examination No Length CSL Type 29 IFT Reserve 30 PRO Function Protect 32 SF2 Read Sensitivity High 31 SF1...

Page 817: ...s requirements specified for the following items If a wrong LENGTH is used the setup results in error so that the machine may not operate prop erly 3 IPS IP Address CPU90E Length 15 4 IPI IP Address C...

Page 818: ...n the same network should be assigned A Z 9 SFC 0 Manual sensitivity setup menu setup 0 OFF 1 ON Standard Semi High Speed 2 ON Standard Semi High Speed High Speed 10 SFD 0 Manual sensitivity default s...

Page 819: ...tion with HIS 0 ID 1 ID RECEPT 2 ID EXAM 3 ID RECEPT EXAM 0 DISABLE 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON ON TR1B1106 EPS 23 10 Setting of ID number character string length 1 10 ID_INFO_TYPE 0 1 64 ID_INFO_TYPE 1 24 Sett...

Page 820: ...g scheme 0 0 Pad with space to the head Ex 123 1 Pad with zero to the head Ex 00123 2 Pad with space to the tail Ex 123 3 Pad with zero to the tail Ex 12300 28 Setting of examination number padding sc...

Page 821: ...ace 4 MPM 4 space 2 6 space 4 film mark 6 7 department name 4 MPM 4 space 2 34 PTR 0 Position of film mark or menu character string outputted with GRP valid when GRP 2 3 6 0 F hexadecimal notation 35...

Page 822: ...g root 2 0 Private Image UID IDT Type 0 org root 2 1 MAC Address Time Stamp Unique ID CSL Type 1 org root 2 1 Accesion Number 2 org root 2 2 Study Date Modality CR Accesion Number 3 org root 2 3 Study...

Page 823: ...ero to the tail EX 12340000 2 Patient information acquisition setting during ID online ID_ RET 0 55 Study Series information numbering setting UID CSL type 0 Study Series information is not numbered o...

Page 824: ...in FINP patient name in languages other than Japanese PN_FDS 0 Space 1 Caret 2 Comma 0 65 Setting of delimiter for patient name components in FINP patient name in Japanese language PN_FDM 0 Space 1 Ca...

Page 825: ...nts in FINP PN_ FCM3 F Family name G Given name M Middle name P Prefix S Suffix FGM 74 Setting of multi byte patient name components for four components in FINP PN_ FCM4 F Family name G Given name M M...

Page 826: ...nique non duplicate IP address over the single network and change it to that address Typically because the IP address is also determined as the system configuration is determined the IP address assign...

Page 827: ...tion is switched 0 AUTO SEMI FIX can be selected 1 AUTO SEMI FIX SEMI X can be selected 2 AUTO SEMI FIX SEMI X MANUAL can be selected 18 ID_FILING selection menu for image resolution during OD F filin...

Page 828: ...be set according to the character code used for the patient ID CP850 Character code specified by IBM It includes special characters such as umlaut used in Europe ISO8859 1 Character code specified by...

Page 829: ...ow PN_FDS O Space is handled as a delimiter PN_FDM O Full width space is handled as a delimiter for a patient name in Kanji PN_FCS1 F PN_FCS2 FG PN_FCS3 FGM PN_FCS4 FGMP PN_FCS5 FGMPS PN_FCS1 through...

Page 830: ...the delim iter is a half width space PN_FCM1 F PN_FCM2 FG PN_FCM3 FGM PN_FCM4 FGMP PN_FCM5 FGMPS PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 set components of a name double byte If PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 are set as des...

Page 831: ...nother Note however that the settings should be changed as appropriate for the following three items of SYSTEM Items that Should be Changed for Second and Subsequent Machines 3 IPS Standard LAN IP add...

Page 832: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 41 8 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MU 41 8 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 833: ...8 CSY0 Character Area0 Standard vertical size 30 CSY1 Character Area1 Standard vertical size 29 CSX1 Character Area1 Standard horizontal size 31 CLX0 Character Area0 Large horizontal size 32 CLY0 Char...

Page 834: ...hing 0 NO 1 YES 9 GJ 0 Indent 0 NO 1 YES 10 MF 1 Menu character string display switching 0 NO 1 YES 11 A1 7 Upper limit age in years for age display in months 0 99 12 A2 0 Upper limit age in months fo...

Page 835: ...174 0 1mm 31 CLX0 980 Horizontal size for large size area 0 2 980 0 1mm 32 CLY0 268 Vertical size for large size area 0 2 268 0 1mm 33 CLX1 668 Horizontal size for large size area 1 2 668 0 1mm 34 CL...

Page 836: ...nation for specific MPM code 8 max areas Area position rotation designation MPM1 MPM2 MPM8 XXXX 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 7890 8901 XXXX 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 7890 8901 XXXX 1234 2345 3456...

Page 837: ...r sides of the IP image for ST is trimmed 15 CL date display type A display sample is indicated 17 FR1 14 x17 14 x14 18 43 single image frame display The frame is not displayed if the format is misali...

Page 838: ...th the selection in 47 JSTFY of SYSTEM IRSET CFG SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE The long type format function is intended to extend the number of characters outputted to the HI C655QA film and operation panel Whe...

Page 839: ...1998 10 16 L R ES 102 01 XXXXX A000000 10 00 Hospital name Patient name Sex patient ID age Exposure date exposure time Set processing information Department name FR1B1243 EPS Area 1 The IP number EDR...

Page 840: ...n of area size For the standard size it is designated with 27 CSX0 28 CSY0 29 CSZ1 and 30 CSY1 Area 0 CSX0 CSY0 Area 1 CSX1 CSY1 FR1B1245 EPS For the large size it is designated with 31 CLX0 32 CLY0 3...

Page 841: ...h FC4 denotes any letter from 0 to F Example 123 Represents a MPM code from 1230 to 123F How to set up Position for area 1 0 upper left 1 upper right 2 lower left 3 lower right FR1B1242 EPS 0031 0123...

Page 842: ...Items When a network connection is to be made the following configuration utility setup data must be entered 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 0 QUIT 1 SYSTEM 3 REMOTE SWITCH 2 PRINT 4 EQUIPMENT 5 LOCAL INTERF...

Page 843: ...A hub that complies with SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Format IP address root parameter IP address IP address IP address that is set in the HOSTS file 7 9 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS Parameter When...

Page 844: ...and DISPLAY the output designa tion can be designated by user setting With the CR IR341 the number of hosts that may be set for one function is restricted as follows IDT Up to five IDTs PRINT LOCAL a...

Page 845: ...n ps551 IDT Network connected to fcridt4 1 and fcridt4 2 An example of description bold faced for the above setup is presented below EQUIP Function Host Name Host Name Function OD_FILE or DISPLAY or P...

Page 846: ...for communication requirements over serial line connection No change is necessary because the initial value is used as is NOTE Only when CR LP414N FL IM2636N or FL IM3543N is connected to CR IR341 A0...

Page 847: ...NT Film output enabled HD_FILE Active file enabled DISPLAY Display function OD_FILE Archive file enabled Protocol ID protocol identification number It is set in four hexadecimal digits It may be omitt...

Page 848: ...ption bold faced for the above setup is presented below DEVICE Host Name Attr Attr Protocol ID System code Speed Attr PRINT or HD_FILE or DISPLAY or OD_FILE Protocol ID 0100 FINP or 0110 FINP or 0200...

Page 849: ...ne CR IR341 machine be sure to assign both a standard LAN IP address CPU90E and a LAN board IP address CPU90F Example 172 16 0 1 fcr5000a CR IR341 1 CPU90E 172 16 0 2 fcr5000a 1 CR IR341 1 CPU90F Be s...

Page 850: ...00a 172 16 0 2 fcr5000a 1 172 16 0 11 fcr5000b 172 16 0 12 fcr5000b 1 172 16 0 21 fcridt4 1 172 16 0 22 fcridt4 2 172 16 0 101 hic654 172 16 0 102 odf624 172 16 0 103 fn ps551 Precaution When Used as...

Page 851: ...that is set in the HOSTS file should be set Up to four host names can be set by delimiting them with a space 7 9 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS Setup Example The distribution code is set HI C AA0123 An example o...

Page 852: ...IP address of router is set Host IP IP address of router Host IP may be omitted when Host Name that is set in the HOST file is set Seg Size TCP segment size The TCP segment size is set in bytes Seg S...

Page 853: ...it of the portion handled as the host number is set to 0 It is classified into the following network classes according to the range of the network number portion Class A 255 0 0 0 Class B 255 255 0 0...

Page 854: ...vated 0 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING Area to be to...

Page 855: ...if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP the file cannot be read during RESTORE 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER...

Page 856: ...NOTE The menu parameters saved in the floppy disk also contain the language setting for the machine Thus if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP the file cannot be read duri...

Page 857: ...S551 are connected to the CPU90F board of the machine via a 10Base T hub The machine and FL IMD are connected via the E i f IMG08A The host is temporarily connected including virtual equipment The Hos...

Page 858: ...d Dec Kbytes sec default 8Kbytes sec hic654 DISPLAY HD_FILE 0100 odf624 OD_FILE 0100 fn ps551 PRINT 0100 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS HOSTS Host Name Max 10 characters Available Character a z 0 9 37chars IP Ad...

Page 859: ...ce Manual MU 68 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS MU 68 NETMASKS NETMASKS Network masks database only non default subnet masks need to be defined here Network netmask 172 16 0 0...

Page 860: ...he DISPLAY attribute To deliver the re output from the QA WS to the printer instead of directly delivering the output from the image reader to the printer set LOCAL_R as the PRINT attribute DISPLAY qa...

Page 861: ...16 ASCII characters PortNo Set the TCP port number that the Base on DICOM application uses This entry is meaningless for the transmitting end The default setting is 104 SOPType SOP Class Type definit...

Page 862: ...information about the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination fcr5000n 2 PRINT 0100 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS Set the IP address of the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination 172...

Page 863: ...nto the cassette set unit in the routine processing mode IPs are automatically conveyed a set number of times Three types of operation modes are available as follows 1 READING ERASURE Reading operatio...

Page 864: ...e executing the routine processing If the routine processing is executed without this setting operation error may result 1 Select 3 TEST MODE 2 Select 2 AUTO MODE The operation modes are displayed 3 S...

Page 865: ...age memory that is a shared portion of the memory and ends with its test result displayed If an error is detected the mode ends with the error causing memory address indicated in X Y coordinates on th...

Page 866: ...lished between the destination host and the LAN CPU90E CPU90F of the machine 1 Execute 2 PING The following message appears INPUT THE CONNECTED HOST NAME OR IP ADDRESS Meaning Enter the host name or I...

Page 867: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 76 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 MU 76 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 1 8 CONTENTS 3 CPU90F DMA This menu should not be used...

Page 868: ...inter rupted with the following message displayed FILE I O ERROR FILE XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name 9 6 6 FDD FDD Test 1 WRITE READ VERIFY Write and Read Tests to FD Diagnostic check...

Page 869: ...displayed the polygon stops THE POLYGON IS TURNED OFF 2 Select 2 POLYGON and 2 ON in sequence With the following message displayed the polygon starts to rotate THE POLYGON IS TURNED ON 10 3 3 LASER La...

Page 870: ...h voltage power supply failure ANALOG POWER SUPPLY ERROR Meaning Analog power supply failure HV OFF Meaning HV switch OFF 10 5 5 HV DATA High Voltage Setting The high voltage applied to the photomulti...

Page 871: ...Width in Checks Replacement and Adjustment Volume 1 DEFAULT To Display Result after Setting Read Start Position and Read Width to Their Default The read start position PIXEL and read width FREQ are s...

Page 872: ...LT XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX represents the result OK normal ERROR error 3 PIXEL ADJUST To Adjust Read Start Position The read start position is adjusted The setup value is not written to the hard disk 1...

Page 873: ...wing message displayed THE SPECIAL MODE TO RECORD ADJUSTMENT DATA IS SET Meaning The correction data recording mode is set NOTE REC MODE recording of correction data is effective for a single reading...

Page 874: ...mes effective in the routine mode Execute 3 SHADING POLYGON CORRECTION 2 ON Once the shading polygon correction mode is set to ON the following message appears THE NORMAL MODE WITH SHADING POLYGON COR...

Page 875: ...XXXX XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name 2 SAVE SENSITIVITY DATA To Write Sensitivity Data to Hard Disk It is used when sensitivity correction is performed in 7 SHADING SENSITIVITY Execute 2 SAVE SENS...

Page 876: ...X SMD XXXX Meanings of the displayed data are as follows where XXXX denotes four decimal digits MP Number of invalid pixels TMP Total number of invalid pixels TML Total number of invalid lines RCNT Re...

Page 877: ...from the floppy disk the following message appears XXXXXXXXXX IS LOADED If the process ends in error the following message appears FILE I O ERROR FILE XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX represents the file name 6...

Page 878: ...message appears SCANNER DIAGNOSTIC IS IN PROGRESS RESULT OK Meaning Scanner self diagnostics is now being performed If it ends in error either of the following messages appears START POINT DETECTION E...

Page 879: ...n a normal X ray image is inputted as a quasi image signal Thus minute flickering which will not pose any problem for a typical image may appear as nonuniformity depending on image processing requirem...

Page 880: ...on SCN08 Board Select 3 SCN08 INPUT The following message appears THE SPECIAL MODE FOR VIRTUAL IMAGE IS SET Meaning The quasi reading mode is now set 4 ROUTINE To Cancel Virtual Generation Mode for Im...

Page 881: ...ZE Initialization of Motors Actuators and Sensors NOTE When the mode is transitioned to M Utility during initialization or while an error message is displayed be sure to execute 1 INITIALIZE If it is...

Page 882: ...F MOTOR 1 10 Meaning Enter the number of motor 2 Type in the number of motor from 1 through 10 The following message appears INPUT THE ROTATION DERECTION 1 CW 2 CCW FIXED X Meaning Enter the rotation...

Page 883: ...ng message appears INPUT THE SLEW DOWN TIME 1000 LOW SPEED 3000 FIXED XXXX Meaning Enter the slew down time XXXX denotes the slew down time that is currently set 8 Type in the slew down time The follo...

Page 884: ...wer driving energized stop with power down delay 2 Low power driving energized stop with power down delay 3 High power driving deenergized stop with power down delay 4 Low power driving deenergized st...

Page 885: ...1 6 MD2 7 MD3 8 ME1 9 ME2 10 MF1 INPUT THE NUMBER OF MOTOR 1 10 Meaning Enter the number of motor 2 Type in the number of motor The motor is driven 4 STOP To Stop Motor 1 Select 4 STOP The following m...

Page 886: ...owing message appears 1 SOLA1 2 SOLA2 3 SOLA3 4 SOLA4 5 PB1 6 SVB1 7 SOLF1 8 SOLC1 9 LAMP STB 10 LAMP ON 11 FFM INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR 1 11 Meaning Enter the number of actuator 2 Type in 11 The...

Page 887: ...INPUT THE NUMBER OF ACTUATOR 1 11 Meaning Enter the number of actuator 2 Type in the number of actuator either 1 through 11 The actuator is driven 3 STOP To Stop Actuator 1 Select 3 STOP The followin...

Page 888: ...15 SA15 16 SA16 17 SA17 18 SB1 19 SB2 20 SB3 21 SB4 22 SB5 23 SC1 24 SC2 25 SD1 26 SD2 27 SD3 28 SE1 29 SF1 30 SF2 31 SF3 32 SF4 33 SZ2 34 SZ3 2 MONITOR To Monitor Individual Sensor 1 Select 2 MONITOR...

Page 889: ...the numbers and status 0 OPEN 1 CLOSE of sensors are displayed SA1 17 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 SB1 5 1 0 1 0 0 SC1 2 0 0 SD1 3 1 1 0 SE1 1 SF1 4 0 0 0 0 SZ2 3 1 0 0 QUIT When the sensor statu...

Page 890: ...ep mode 2 Enter the operation mode either 1 or 2 of the IP removal arm The following message appears SET THE CASSETTE TO SHELF1 Meaning Set a cassette into the topmost shelf 3 Set a cassette When 1 NO...

Page 891: ...appears UP DOWN UNIT H P SETTING IS IN PROGRESS RESULT OK or RESULT ERROR Meaning IP removal unit home positioning is now being performed 2 MOVE POSITION To Input Unit Position 1 Select 2 MOVE POSITIO...

Page 892: ...performed 2 GRIP To Effect Grip Operation for Side Positioning Mechanism Execute 2 GRIP Once it is executed normally the following message appears MOVED TOWARD THE NIPPING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS RESU...

Page 893: ...ration mode either 1 or 2 When 1 NORMAL is selected When a series of side positioning operations is initiated the following message appears SIDE POSITIONING PROCESS IS IN PROGRESS ARE YOU SURE TO MOVE...

Page 894: ...eading Conveyor Grip Mechanism Execute 2 GRIP Once it is executed normally the following message appears MOVED TOWARD THE NIPPING POSITION IS IN PROGRESS RESULT OK Meaning Grip operation of the after...

Page 895: ...ULT OK Meaning Grip operation of the driving shaft is now being performed DRIVE TIME is displayed in units of 10 msec If it ends in error ERROR XXXX appears XXXX denotes an error code 2 RELEASE To Rel...

Page 896: ...ENTS 3 D A DATA To Display Data Related to Driving Shaft Grip Operation Execute 3 D A DATA The following message appears DRIVING GRIP D A DATA DEFAULT CURRENT RELEASE HIGH xxxx xxxx LOW xxxx xxxx GRIP...

Page 897: ...T OK Meaning Grip operation of the driven shaft is now being performed DRIVE TIME is displayed in units of 10 msec If it ends in error ERROR XXXX appears XXXX denotes an error code 2 RELEASE To Releas...

Page 898: ...Operation Execute 3 D A DATA The following message appears DRIVING GRIP D A DATA DEFAULT CURRENT RELEASE HIGH xxxx xxxx LOW xxxx xxxx GRIP ST xxxx xxxx HR xxxx xxxx Each item of the data is indicated...

Page 899: ...d before putting it into the floppy disk drive Under the write protected condition the floppy disk cannot be format ted 1 FORMAT FD To Format FD 1 Select 1 FORMAT FD The following message appears PLEA...

Page 900: ...YOU SURE TO FORMAT THE IMAGE PARTITION 1 YES 2 NO DEFAULT 2 Meaning Are you sure to format the image storage partition 2 Select 1 Once it is formatted the following message appears FORMATTING THE IMA...

Page 901: ...ed with the following messages displayed as files are copied to the floppy disk XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXXXX is copied When the floppy disk becomes...

Page 902: ...ges displayed as files are copied to the floppy disk XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXXXX is copied When the floppy disk becomes full the following message...

Page 903: ...ges displayed as files are copied to the floppy disk XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXXXX is copied When the floppy disk becomes full the following message...

Page 904: ...d to the floppy disk XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXXXX is copied When the floppy disk becomes full the following message appears THE FD IS FULL EXCHANGE...

Page 905: ...layed as files are copied to the floppy disk XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXXXX is copied When the floppy disk becomes full the following message appears...

Page 906: ...e following messages displayed as files are copied to the floppy disk XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXXXX is copied When the floppy disk becomes full the...

Page 907: ...lation 1 SCANNER DATA To Read Scanner Data from FD to HD 1 Select 1 SCANNER DATA The following message appears PLEASE SET A FD ARE YOU SURE TO COPY SCANNER DATAS TO THE HD 1 YES 2 NO DEFAULT 2 Meaning...

Page 908: ...2 NO DEFAULT 2 Meaning Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Are you sure to copy the machine setup files to the hard disk 2 Select 1 Once the data is copied to the hard disk the following mess...

Page 909: ...T 2 Meaning Put a floppy disk into the floppy disk drive Are you sure to copy the network data to the hard disk 2 Select 1 Once the data is copied to the hard disk the following message appears XXXXXX...

Page 910: ...disk drive Are you sure to copy the image processing parameters to the hard disk 2 Select 1 Once the data is copied to the hard disk the following message appears XXXXXXXXXX IS COPIED Meaning XXXXXXXX...

Page 911: ...g message is displayed FILE I O ERROR FILE XXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXX denotes the file name 6 EDR PROCESSING DATA To Read EDR Parameter File from FD to HD 1 Select 6 EDR PROCESSING DATA The following messa...

Page 912: ...er A001 to A999 It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on whether the previous page and or next page is available 2 Type in 1 through 10 11 or 12 to s...

Page 913: ...t varies depending on whether the previous page and or next page is available 2 Type in 1 through 10 11 or 12 to select an image to be saved to a floppy disk i e an image for which EDR calculated valu...

Page 914: ...TEM SOFTWARE The following message appears ARE YOU SURE TO INSTALL PREVIOUS VERSION 1 YES 2 NO DEFAULT 2 Meaning Are you sure to revert back to the previous version 2 Select 1 Once the system software...

Page 915: ...YYYYY File name It should be noted that the display format of the last line in the list varies depending on whether the previous page and or next page is available 2 Type in 1 through 10 11 or 12 to s...

Page 916: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 125 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 MU 125 12 13 14 15 11 16 17 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 917: ...with the following message displayed BACKUP MEMORIES ARE CLEARED Meaning The backup memory is initialized 3 Repeat 0 ENT M Utility is exited 4 Press the RESET switch of the machine The following files...

Page 918: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 127 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 MU 127 12 13 14 15 11 16 17 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 919: ...in ON status while 9 HV ON is displayed when it is in OFF status To turn high voltage switch OFF When the high voltage switch is in the ON position menu item 9 is displayed as 9 HV OFF 0 QUIT 1 ERROR...

Page 920: ...CHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV ON 10 IP UTILITY 1 Select 9 HV ON When the high voltage switch is set to ON the following message appears TURNING ON THE HV IS IN PROGRESS RESULT O...

Page 921: ...contents of the icons may be edited through seven commands 1 The image parameter is displayed and edited CODE MENU ID 2 SKULL GENERAL SKULL GENERAL AUT UTO 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 A P A P TWIN TWIN 1 12345 1...

Page 922: ...is set for each menu group 5 COPY Copies duplicates the existing menu to add a new menu 6 DELETE Deletes menus 7 FILMMARK edit film mark Adds or deletes a film mark The display location of the film m...

Page 923: ...eter R STDMENU PRM OP PRM HP PRM PEM PRM User defined image processing parameter R W STDUMN PRM OPU PRM HPU PRM PEMU PRM COPY BODYDISP CFG R MENUDISP CFG R W MPM_DEF PRM R W Fuji Standard image proces...

Page 924: ...TION NUMBER OF SOURCE OR TO SPECIFY ROUTINE LIST Meaning Select the number of the anatomical region to be displayed on screen To display the routine menu type in 2 Select 2 CHEST LIST 2 The following...

Page 925: ...0 CHEST LYMPHA FRN C 11 CHEST LYMPHA LAT C 12 SHLD JNT ARTHRO C 13 LUNG T 14 MEDIASTINUM T 15 STERNUM T 16 THORA SPINE FRN T 17 THORA SPINE LAT T 18 SHOULDER JOINT T 19 CHEST MAG M Meaning Non display...

Page 926: ...appears 0 HEAD 1 NECK 2 CHEST 3 BREAST 4 ABDOMEN 5 PELVIS 6 UP EXT 7 LOW EXT 8 TEST MOVE TYPE POSITION NUMBER OR TO MOVE POSITIONS MOVE Meaning Select the number of the anatomical region to be change...

Page 927: ...HE DESTINATION OR PAGE NUMBER MOVE Meaning Type in the page number and display location of the destination to which the selected menu is to be moved To display the menu type in P page number Example T...

Page 928: ...ppears 0 HEAD 1 NECK 2 CHEST 3 BREAST 4 ABDOMEN 5 PELVIS 6 UP EXT 7 LOW EXT 8 TEST MOVE TYPE POSITION NUMBER OR TO MOVE POSITIONS MOVE Meaning Select the number of the anatomical region to be changed...

Page 929: ...EST 23 24 25 26 27 28 SPECIFY TWO LOCATIONS TO EXCHANGE TYPE FIRST LOCATION MOVE Meaning Select the menu number of the icon to be moved 3 Select 11 HEAD MOVE 11 The following message appears TYPE ANOT...

Page 930: ...NE ROUTINE Meaning Select the number of the anatomical region for registration of the routine menu To display the routine menu type in 2 Select 1 NECK ROUTINE 1 The following message appears 011 CERVI...

Page 931: ...S 013 MANDIBLE 014 ORBIT 015 HEAD SOFT TISSUE 061 HEAD MAG M 062 063 AVE5CM16 064 065 TYPE NEW LOCATION NUMBER OR PAGE NUMBER P01 P06 ROUTINE Meaning Specify where 011 CERVICAL GENERAL selected is reg...

Page 932: ...N NUMBER OF THE SOURCE OR TO SPECIFY ROUTINE ROUTINE Meaning Select the number of the anatomical region for registration of the routine menu To display the routine menu type in 2 Type in ROUTINE The f...

Page 933: ...PE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE DESTINATION TO DISSELECT OR PAGE NUMBER P01 P06 ROUTINE Meaning To delete disselect the menu selected type in To display the menu type in P page number Example To display the...

Page 934: ...number of the anatomical region to be edited 2 Select 1 NECK EDIT 1 The following message appears 011 CERVICAL GENERAL 012 CERVICAL SPINE 013 PHARYNX LARYNX 014 CERVIC PEDIATRICS 015 LARYNX 35KV 1 OP...

Page 935: ...4 39 R 40 0 5 R 41 4 42 R 43 5 0 S 44 4 45 R 46 0 5 DRN DRT DRE ORN ORD ORE L 47 5 48 A 49 0 0 50 5 51 1 52 0 0 R 53 5 54 A 55 0 0 56 5 57 1 58 0 0 S 59 5 60 A 61 0 0 62 5 63 1 64 0 0 HDN HDT HDE HRN...

Page 936: ...the item number to be edited To display all the item numbers type in To display the item numbers on a page by page basis type in P page number Example To display the menu on the first page type in P01...

Page 937: ...aning Select the number of the anatomical region to be copied 2 Select 1 NECK COPY 1 The following message appears 011 CERVICAL GENERAL 012 CERVICAL SPINE 013 PHARYNX LARYNX 014 CERVIC PEDIATRICS 015...

Page 938: ...essage appears TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE DESTINATION OR PAGE NUMBER P01 COPY Meaning Select the copy destination To display the menu type in P page number Example To display the menu on the first pa...

Page 939: ...TYPE POSITION NUMBER DELETE Meaning Select the number of the anatomical region to be deleted 2 Select 1 NECK DELETE 1 The following message appears 011 CERVICAL GENERAL 012 CERVICAL SPINE 013 PHARYNX...

Page 940: ...16 17 CONTENTS 3 Select 021 CERVICAL GENERAL DELETE 21 The following message appears DELETE NECK 021 CERVICAL GENERAL Y N DELETE Meaning Are you sure to delete the menu selected 4 Type in Y DELETE Y...

Page 941: ...3 DELETE TYPE FUNCTION NUMBER FILMMARK Meaning Select a film mark edit menu 2 Select 0 ENTRY FILMMARK 0 The following message appears 12 AP 13 PA 14 L R 15 R L 16 L 21 R 22 LAT 23 OBL 24 25 26 31 32...

Page 942: ...message appears 12 AP 13 PA 14 L R 15 R L 16 L 21 R 22 LAT 23 OBL 24 ABC 25 26 31 32 33 34 35 TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE FILMMARK Meaning Select the menu number to be moved 3 Select 24 ABC FIL...

Page 943: ...LMMARK 2 The following message appears 12 AP 13 PA 14 L R 15 R L 16 L 21 R 22 LAT 23 OBL 24 25 26 ABC 31 32 33 34 35 TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE FILMMARK Meaning Select the menu number to be ed...

Page 944: ...mark edit menu 2 Select 3 DELETE FILMMARK 3 The following message appears 12 AP 13 PA 14 L R 15 R L 16 L 21 R 22 LAT 23 OBL 24 25 26 DEF 31 32 33 34 35 TYPE LOCATION NUMBER OF THE SOURCE FILMMARK Mea...

Page 945: ...isks varies with the software version Before installing the software check that the installation FDs are supplied as indicated in the following list Name Storage device number Quantity Use System disk...

Page 946: ...to turn OFF the ma chine 2 Insert the INSTALL system disk into the floppy disk drive CAUTION Do not erroneously interchange the INSTALL system disk and FORMAT system disk If you turn ON the machine wi...

Page 947: ...To sd0 TEMP VXWORKS ST Copy fd0 version dat To sd0 TEMP VERSION DAT Copy fd0 script txt To sd0 TEMP SCRIPT TXT Insert next data floppy disk 5 Insert the remaining data disks in numerical order As indi...

Page 948: ...n fd0 VXWORKS ST please setting boot disk The disk placed in the disk drive is not the installation system disk or the contents of the disk are damaged Error loading file fd0 VXWORKS ST The contents o...

Page 949: ...open directory status The directory was not found the portion is a detail code The SCSI hard disk drive is faulty error create file status The file could not be generated the portion is a detail code...

Page 950: ...uently occurs or the data on the hard disk is lost wholly or partly 1 Make sure that the machine is powered OFF If the power is ON place the circuit breaker in the OFF position to power OFF the machin...

Page 951: ...s activated 4 Select 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING and 1 SYSTEM in sequence 5 Set the language setting item FNT to 1 6 Touch the SAVE key The edited content is saved to the HD 0 SP 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILIT...

Page 952: ...ns to the U Utility mode 10 Press the RESET button The machine is reset so that the setting of the file installed becomes effective 0 SP D 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING 7 0 Q...

Page 953: ...reen DPR ABS Main program file FFASC8 FNT ASCII fonts 8 dots FFASCW8 FNT ASCII white fonts 8 dots FFASC16 FNT ASCII fonts 16 dots FFASC24 FNT ASCII fonts 24 dots FFASCE8 FNT ASCII external fonts 8 dot...

Page 954: ...nit IDT or LP etc CODEDSTB Distribution code definition file HOSTS Connected host setup file Correspondence table between connected host name and IP address DEVICE Device setup file Correspondence tab...

Page 955: ...uji standard table HIPOPU PRM Optional image processing parameter file Institution specific table HIPOPT PRM Optional mask filter table Fuji standard table optional image processing table HIPOPTU PRM...

Page 956: ...DFORM CFG Magnetic card specific information setup file SIOSETUP CSL Data link layer setup parameter definition file PNL MESSAGES JPN Display message definition file Message data indicated on the disp...

Page 957: ...sure conveyance speed table determination file For table determination complying with the erasure control specification DEL_DEFN FIL Erasure conveyance speed definition file Conveyance speed table com...

Page 958: ...CN_SHDG SHD Shading correction data file Shading correction result SCN_SHDG DEF Shading correction data file default data Shading correction result for institution with poor tube conditions SCN_SHDG O...

Page 959: ...program DSP21M1J S24 Image processing program DSP21M2J S24 Image processing program DSP30M1J S24 Image processing program DSP30M2J S24 Image processing program DSP31M1J S24 Image processing program D...

Page 960: ...file PNL SED log journal SED_IPH 000 SED log save file IPH SED log journal SED_IMG 000 SED log save file IMG SED log journal SED_IIF 000 SED log save file IIF SED log journal SED_CSL 000 SED log save...

Page 961: ...on log journal GD_LIF 000 Global data LIF External unit communication log journal GD_FOT 000 Global data FOT External unit communication log journal GD_FIN 000 Global data FIN External unit communicat...

Page 962: ...CR IR341 Service Manual MU 171 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 MU 171 12 13 14 15 16 17 11 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 963: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Service Parts List SP...

Page 964: ...6 SP 38 INDEX 04G UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 7 SP 40 INDEX 05A BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 SP 42 INDEX 05B BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 SP 44 INDEX 05C BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 SP...

Page 965: ...P 80 INDEX 10C SUB SCANNING UNIT 3 SP 82 INDEX 11 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT SP 84 INDEX 12A CONTROLLER 1 SP 86 INDEX 12B CONTROLLER 2 SP 88 INDEX 13 OPTION SP 90 INDEX 14 CABLE SP 92 INDEX 15 CONNECTION DI...

Page 966: ...Reason Pages affected Issue date 05 31 99 04 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages FM2460 11 20 99 05 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages FM2638 08 30 2001 07 Design c...

Page 967: ...n is blank the parts are applicable to all the relevant units Export regulations applicable character Parts without the following character are not controlled by export regulations Parts applicable to...

Page 968: ...its N Quantity used in a single system Q N 1 Rank A 1 Q x 0 3 Rank C 1 Q x 0 05 Rank D 1 Q x 0 02 2 N 10 Rank A 2 N x Q x 0 3 Rank C 2 N x Q x 0 05 Rank D 1 N x Q x 0 02 11 N 300 Rank A 3 N x Q x 0 3...

Page 969: ...LY 2 CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 01A INDEX 01B INDEX 01C INDEX 02A INDEX 02B INDEX 03A INDEX 03B INDEX 03C INDEX 04A INDEX UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 2 UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 3 04B INDEX 04C UP DOWN IP REMOVAL...

Page 970: ...X 05E INDEX 06A INDEX 06B INDEX UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 6 UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 7 BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 1 BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 06C INDEX 06D BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR...

Page 971: ...NVEYOR 2 07A INDEX 07B INDEX 07C INDEX 08A INDEX 08B INDEX 08C INDEX 08D INDEX 09 INDEX 10A INDEX AFTER READING CONVEYOR 1 AFTER READING CONVEYOR 2 AFTER READING CONVEYOR 3 ERASURE CONVEYOR 3 10B INDE...

Page 972: ...R 2 CABLE INDEX 13 OPTION PARTS NOS SEARCH TABLE INDEX 16 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS INDEX 18 CONNECTION DIAGRAM INDEX 15 TABLE OF SCREWS WASHERS INDICATION SYMBOLS INDEX 17 INDEX 11 SCANNING OPTICS...

Page 973: ...638 DETAIL A A B B 1 6 4 5 8 11 12 10 11 9 4 7 13 14 1 15 16 17 13 2 S3x 6 2 W3 20 21 19 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 41 29 19 1 1 18 30 37 36 35 40 38 2 3 4 31 32 33 34 FR1Z0006 EPS DETAIL B 39 2 B3X6 4 0...

Page 974: ...0N1998F Lower Rear Cover 1 D 8 2 350Y1316 Lower Rear Cover 1 For PHILIPS D 8 3 350Y1334 Lower Rear Cover 1 For SIEMENS D 9 382N0999 Sponge Tape 1 T3xW10xL558 D 10 382N0997 Sponge Tape 1 T12xW15xL558 D...

Page 975: ...nese E 31 2 405N2387 Label 1 English E 31 3 405N2388 Label 1 German E 31 4 405N2389 Label 1 French E 31 5 405N2390 Label 1 Italian E 31 6 405N2391 Label 1 Spanish E 31 7 405N2392 Label 1 Portuguese E...

Page 976: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 11 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 BLANK PAGE...

Page 977: ...2638 4 S3x6 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 14 16 15 17 18 17 20 19 36 37 32 36 33 25 29 30 31 8 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 21 22 24 23 39 40 2 Q4x6 3 BR4x8 22 26 28 27 31 34 35 36 37 8 8 FR1Z0008 EPS A...

Page 978: ...xW10xL446 D 12 382N0975 Sponge Tape 2 T12xW10xL40 D 13 382N0994 Sponge Tape 2 T12xW10xL140 D 14 382N0987 Sponge Tape 2 T12xW10xL148 D 15 382N0995 Sponge Tape 2 T12xW10xL56 D 16 352N0394 Panel 1 D 17 3...

Page 979: ...e Tape 1 T12xW10xL64 D 35 382N0973 Sponge Tape 2 T12xW10xL20 D 36 382N1036 Sponge Tape 4 T10xW8xL55 D 37 382N1037 Sponge Tape 2 T5xW60xL55 D 38 1 350Y1327A Lower Left Hand Side Cover 1 D 38 2 350Y1360...

Page 980: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 15 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 BLANK PAGE...

Page 981: ...P 16 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 4 BR4x8 24 23 22 21 20 26 25 27 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 12 9 8 19 18 17 10 15 1 13 14 16 5 BR4x12 2 B3x6 2 B3x6 5 BR4x12 4 T4x6 2 BR4x12 9 M3x6 3 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 28 FR1Z0010 EPS...

Page 982: ...1 D 10 363Y0280C Guide 1 D 11 363Y0279C Guide 1 D 12 363Y0278C Guide 1 E 13 138S0132 Ferrite Bead 1 D 14 363N7111A Guide 1 D 15 363N7112A Guide 1 D 16 363N7106B Guide 1 D 17 363N7115B Guide 1 D 18 36...

Page 983: ...PS X X 3 B3x6 3 B3x6 3 4 1 2 5 2 BR4x8 6 BR4x12 6 BR4x12 17 2 T4x6 3B 12 4 BR4x8 4x4 BR 6x12 6 7 8 9 18 4 T4x6 3B 19 2 T4x6 3B BR4x8 10 2 BR4x8 15 11 14 16 2 BRx8 3 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 4 T4x6 3B 3 B...

Page 984: ...y 4 D 8 363Y0293A Guide Plate 1 E 9 363N1973C Guide Plate 1 E 10 355N0499D Frame 1 E 11 356N5928 Bracket 1 D 12 365S0028 Rail 2 203 16 5619 E 13 356N5921B Bracket 1 E 14 356N5942A Bracket 1 E 15 356N5...

Page 985: ...2 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 5 6 7 5 2 BR4x8 4 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 30 28 29 28 27 5 TR4x6 5 TR4x6 5 TR4x6 3 BR4x8 26 21 40 3 BR4x8 3 BR4x8 4 B3x6 15 15 16 12 2 BR4x12 32 31 31 32 33 6 BR3...

Page 986: ...N6015 Bracket 1 E 17 382N0977 Shock Absorber 1 E 18 382N0978 Shock Absorber 1 E 19 352N0392C Panel 1 E 20 382N0979 Shock Absorber 1 D 21 382N1035 Sponge Tape 1 T12xW20xL80 E 22 382N0975 Shock Absorber...

Page 987: ...1 20 99 FM2638 03A CASSETTE SET UNIT 1 FR1Z0015 EPS 15 16 17 14 20 19 18 13 9 10 8 2 1 3 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 B3x6 E3 4 BR4x30 4 Na4 4x3 B3x6 4 B3x10 2 B3x6 11 11 12 2 BR4x8 3 BR4x8 5 BR4x8 4 B3x6 BQ4x10 FR1...

Page 988: ...E 5 362N0450A Support 4 D 6 388N2389 Extension Spring 4 E 7 319N3335A Shaft 4 D 8 388N3076A Torsion Coil Spring 4 E 9 341N0860B Arm 4 E 10 347N0745 Spacer 4 4x20 E 11 308S1422610 Sems Screw 4 S M2 6x...

Page 989: ...9 40 35 BR4x8 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 Q4x12 2 Q4x12 2 Q4x12 2 Q4x12 BR4x8 BR4x8 2 B3x10 B3x10 B3x6 BR4x8 B3x10 Q4x12 Q4x12 Q4x12 Q4x12 BR4x8 2 Q4x8 BQ4x10 BR4x8 2 Q4x8 Q3x12 SW3 S3x10 Q3x12 SW3 BQ4x10 Q3x12 Q...

Page 990: ...13B Guide 4 D 17 384N0046 Tape 4 E 18 356N5914C Bracket 4 D 19 363N1788A Guide 4 E 20 347N0704 Spacer 8 3x2 5 E 21 313N0967 Stay 4 D 22 322SY146 Plain Bearing 8 HPF 0505 E 23 356N5915C Bracket 3 For t...

Page 991: ...al SP 26 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 03C CASSETTE SET UNIT 3 FR1Z0019 EPS A DETAIL A 4 Places 4 Places 11 12 13 14 15 7 6 1 2 3 4 5 5 5 5 3 2 8 4 9 BR4x8 BR4x8 B3x6 W3 10 BR4x8 4 BR4x12 B3x6 B3x6 B3x6...

Page 992: ...N5949A Bracket 8 D 5 334Y3160 Rubber Roller 4 E 6 356N5895B C Bracket 1 D 7 104N0044 Photo Sensor 1 SA17 D 8 388N2407 Extension Spring 4 E 9 356N5948 Bracket 3 E 10 308S3420210 Double Sems Screw 8 S M...

Page 993: ...x10 BR4x8 E4 Q4x12 SW4 SW4 SW4 W4 W4 Q4x12 SW4 2 BR4x8 BR4x30 2 B3x6 W4 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x16 2 BR4x8 S3x8 S3x6 3B B3x6 BR4x8 4 BQ4x10 BR4x30 B3x6 SW4 W4 E10 SW4 Q4x12 SW4 SW4 W4 W4 B3x6 B3x6 B3x10 B3x10 B...

Page 994: ...7 Plain Bearing 2 D 19 334N3489 Rubber Roller 1 E 20 356N6411 Bracket 1 D 21 363Y0276B Guide Plate 1 D 22 363Y0275B Guide Plate 1 D 23 363Y0274B Guide Plate 1 E 24 356N6409 Bracket 1 E 25 347N0701 Spa...

Page 995: ...38 23 29 29 30 30 31 36 33 39 41 40 35 34 23 24 33 32 29 30 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 B3x6 E3 B3x6 BR4x8 E4 3 SW4 2 SW4 3 Q4x12 2 Q4x12 2 BR4x8 B3x6 2 WP4x8 3B E3 E3 4 BR4x8 2 B3x10 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR3x6 BR3x...

Page 996: ...372S0050 Joint 2 E 19 372S0048 Joint 1 E 20 372S0053 Joint 1 E 21 316S0146 Clamp 1 D 22 118YX164 Stepping Motor 1 MB1 D 23 322SF061 Bearing 2 E 24 347N0636 Spacer 1 8x4 D 25 323S3073 Timing Belt 1 UN...

Page 997: ...51 05 11 20 99 FM2638 12 13 14 11 1 B3x6 10 8 9 7 8 3 2 20 3 6 5 3 4 3 2 1 3 19 17 16 17 16 15 12 22 21 Q3x12 E3 B3x6 B3x6 B3x6 B3x6 2 B3x6 E3 2 B3x6 Na3 18 2 B3x6 2 B3x10 B3x6 13 FR1Z0026 EPS 04C UP...

Page 998: ...2 80F 0304 E 9 356Y0174 Bracket 1 E 10 356N5967 Bracket 1 E 11 362N0469A Support 1 D 12 322SF103 Bearing 2 FLWA674ZZA E 13 347N0727 Spacer 2 4x2 E 14 309S0002 Polypropylene Slider 4 For looseness eli...

Page 999: ...R4x30 24 25 24 23 22 12 11 26 E4 E6 29 27 28 22 12 11 E6 19 2 A4x10 21 20 WP 3B 18 17 15 16 2 A3x8 14 13 12 11 11 12 13 14 8 2 B3x6 2 B4x8 BR4x8 2 A3x8 2 B3x6 9 5 6 4 3 2 1 2 BR4x8 B3x6 B3x6 B3x6 Y 7...

Page 1000: ...F050 Bearing 8 WBC8 14ZZA D 12 360N0339A Housing 8 D 13 388N2390 Extension Spring 2 D 14 327N1121608A Spur Gear 4 D 15 113Y1038 Board Assembly 1 SB2 E 16 347N1196A Spacer 1 E 17 308S1422614 Sems Screw...

Page 1001: ...99 FM2638 04E UP DOWN IP REMOVAL UNIT 5 FR1Z0029 EPS A A A A DETAIL A 10 3 14 3 16 8 E6 E6 11 15 13 17 18 6 5 18 6 5 17 17 18 6 5 17 18 6 5 1 13 12 11 E6 5 6 7 8 E6 10 3 4 3 5 6 7 8 E6 9 5 6 7 8 5 6 7...

Page 1002: ...earing 16 WBC8 14ZZA D 6 360N0339A Housing 16 D 7 388N2384 Extension Spring 4 D 8 324N3038C Timing Belt Wheel 5 D 9 323S3288 Timing Belt 1 UNITTA 705 3M 9 E 10 319N2940 Shaft 5 D 11 324N3125 Timing Be...

Page 1003: ...38 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 2 BR4x8 7 2 BR4x8 7 2 BR4x8 7 8 8 8 9 5 E4 5 E4 5 E4 5 E4 10 10 10 10 11 12 12 12 4 Q3x12 4 Na3 4 BR4x8 4 S3x8 3B 2 3 1 6 5 4 E4 4 B3x10 4 FR1Z0032 EPS 04F UP DOWN IP RE...

Page 1004: ...0008 Retaining Ring 4 CS Ring 3 D 3 388N2392A Extension Spring 4 E 4 356N5815B Bracket 4 D 5 322SY097 Plain Bearing 8 80F0603 E 6 341N0863A Arm 4 D 7 363N1765B Guide Plate 3 D 8 334N3463A Rubber Rolle...

Page 1005: ...4x8 BR4x8 E4 BR4x8 6 BR4x16 3 BR4x8 2 B3x10 17 15 2 B3x6 16 13 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 14 BR4x8 12 S3x8 11 5 BQ4x10 6 BR4x8 8 7 10 3 T4x6 3B 7 8 9 3 B4x6 4 BR4x20 9 10 21 3 T4x6 3B 3 2 5 4 3 2 1 3 2 20 19 18...

Page 1006: ...7 365N0089 Rail 2 E 8 356N5829 Bracket 2 E 9 318N1053A Bushing 8 4x15 D 10 327N6204701A Rack 2 E 11 346N0978B Reinforcement 1 E 12 401N0741 Counter Plate 1 E 13 356N5826A Bracket 1 E 14 356N5831B Brac...

Page 1007: ...1 FR1Z0035 EPS 2 A3x10 28 27 2 B3x6 2 A3x10 25 3 B3x6 23 22 21 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x12 30 29 26 24 2 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 1 2 3 6 4 5 4 E6 2 8 7 B3x6 12 13 14 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 9 10 11 E6 15 9 10...

Page 1008: ...1KG1 E 10 347N0818 Spacer 2 8x5 D 11 324N3038C Timing Belt Wheel 2 D 12 322SF050 Bearing 8 WBC8 14ZZA D 13 360N0339A Housing 8 D 14 388N2384 Extension Spring 3 D 15 327N1121608A Spur Gear 6 D 16 388N...

Page 1009: ...38 05B BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 2 X X DETAIL A 3 A4x10 16 17 E6 2 12 11 18 19 21 20 Q4x12 SW4 E4 E6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 8 E6 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 8 BR4x30 BR4x30 9 9 10 E6 2 12 11 15 E6 2 3 14 13 4 5 2 E...

Page 1010: ...earing 6 WA676ZZA D 7 324N1026A Flat Belt Wheel 3 E 8 319N2940 Shaft 3 D 9 305N0014A Nut 2 E 10 319N3322A Shaft 1 D 11 322SF061 Bearing 2 SC866ZZNRCS09 1KG1 E 12 347N0818 Spacer 2 8x5 E 13 356N6014 Br...

Page 1011: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 46 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 05C BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 FR1Z0039 EPS 2 B3x6 3 4 5 2 4 BR4x8 1 2 B3x6 4 B3x6 6 B3x6 7 8 7 9 7 6 5 3 WP4x8 FR1Z0040 EPS...

Page 1012: ...PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO E 1 350N2021A Cover 1 D 2 363Y0285B Guide Plate 1 D 3 334N3457A Rubber Roller 1 E 4 363N1758C Guide Plate 1 D 5 334N3456A Rubber Roller 2 E 6 363N1751C Guide Plate 1 D...

Page 1013: ...Service Manual SP 48 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 05D BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 FR1Z0041 EPS BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 1 1 3 2 3 2 10 4 BR3x6 9 8 7 6 4 6 5 4 6 4 6 4 B3x10 B3x10 B3x10 B3x10 FR1Z...

Page 1014: ...AME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO D 1 322SY121 Plain Bearing 2 80F 0805 D 2 334N3457A Rubber Roller 2 D 3 334N3456A Rubber Roller 2 E 4 347N0580 Spacer 4 3x3 5 E 5 313N0952C Stay 1 D 6 363Y0284A Guide 4 D 7 3...

Page 1015: ...l SP 50 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 Y X Y X 2 B3x6 2 B3x6 4 B3x6 4 B3x6 E4 E6 6 3 4 5 7 B3x10 BR4x8 B3x6 E4 12 6 8 9 10 13 14 11 2 B3x6 2 B3x6 2 FR1Z0044 EPS 18 1 16 17 15 05E BEFORE SIDE POSITIONING C...

Page 1016: ...0784 Spacer 1 6x4 D 5 334Y2197B Plastic Roller 1 D 6 322SY121 Plain Bearing 2 80F 0805 A 7 334N5004B Brush Roller 1 E 8 347N0821 Spacer 1 8x8 D 9 327N1124001A Spur Gear 1 E 10 350N1991C Cover 1 E 11 3...

Page 1017: ...2 BR4x8 31 30 16 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 E3 28 2 B3x6 27 26 2 A3x10 S3x8 B3x10 B3x10 S3x8 B3x10 S3x8 BR4x25 25 24 23 22 21 E6 20 E3 T3x6 E4 14 Na3 11 12 6 10 Na3 T3x6 18 19 14 6 11 12 6 17 E4 8 9 8 5 6 7 6...

Page 1018: ...19N7138 Shaft 3 E 15 319N7119 Shaft 3 D 16 333N7000B Reel 6 E 17 401N0749 Counter Plate 6 D 18 383Y0059 Wire 1 D 19 383Y0057 Wire 1 D 20 383Y0058 Wire 1 D 21 322SF050 Bearing 1 WBC8 14ZZA D 22 322SY05...

Page 1019: ...34 E4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 8 7 9 3 10 Na3 3 11 2 E4 T3x6 12 3 B3x6 E4 1 2 14 13 E4 3 4 5 6 1 7 8 7 9 T3x6 16 Na3 3 10 2 3 BR4x20 27 28 A4x10 E4 23 24 23 22 25 26 BR4x20 BR4x20 19 20 21 22 E4 2 3 4 5 7 8 7...

Page 1020: ...eel 3 E 14 401N0749 Counter Plate 3 D 15 383Y0059 Wire 1 D 16 383Y0058 Wire 1 D 17 383Y0057 Wire 1 D 18 388N2396 Extension Spring 1 D 19 322SF050 Bearing 1 WBC8 14ZZA D 20 322SY055 Plain Bearing 2 80F...

Page 1021: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 56 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 06C SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 FR1Z0049 EPS 4 B3x6 3 B3x6 1 1 2 3 B3x6 8 B3x6 4 4 4 6 5 5 3 FR1Z0050 EPS...

Page 1022: ...IDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 3 RANK REF PART NO PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO D 1 363Y1823A Guide Plate 2 D 2 363Y1822A Guide Plate 1 D 3 334N3786 Rubber Roller 1 D 4 334N3785B Rubber Roller 3 D 5 334N3...

Page 1023: ...638 06D SIDE POSITIONING CONVEYOR 4 FR1Z0051 EPS 2 B3x6 4 B3x6 4 B3x6 1 1 1 2 XXXX 2 2 2 1 3 4 2 B3x6 8 9 12 10 11 E4 SW4 Q4x12 13 15 3 A4x10 3 B4x8 13 14 7 Q4x12 SW4 Q4x12 SW4 7 5 6 7 BR4x8 17 16 FR1...

Page 1024: ...M 9 D 6 324N3710B Timing Belt Wheel 1 E 7 318N1700A Bushing 3 4x7 5 D 8 104N0043 Photo Sensor 1 SD2 E 9 356N7419A Bracket 1 D 10 118YX165 Motor 1 MD2 D 11 324N3041E Timing Belt Wheel 1 E 12 347S0068 S...

Page 1025: ...IONING CONVEYOR 5 FR1Z0053 EPS X X 4 B3x6 1 E4 E4 E4 E4 2 3 4 5 6 5 7 8 9 B3x25 2 BR4x8 B3x25 9 8 10 9 11 13 14 B3x6 B3x16 2 B3x6 12 BR4x8 BR4x8 11 9 10 2 BR4x8 24 23 19 17 2 B3x6 20 18 16 15 4 T4x6 2...

Page 1026: ...w 2 D 9 322SY067 Plain Bearing 4 80F 0403 D 10 310N0706 Pin 2 E 11 319N7139 Shaft 2 D 12 388N2723 Extension Spring 2 D 13 334N2339B Roller 1 E 14 319N3438 Shaft 1 D 15 365N7002 Rail 1 D 16 305N0014A N...

Page 1027: ...READING CONVEYOR 1 FR1Z0055 EPS 1 1 20 14 19 18 17 16 4 7 9 2 1 21 7 2 4 2 8 6 3 5 13 12 8 3 5 22 2 6 3 4 5 6 8 2 10 11 7 21 S3x8 4 S3x8 S3x8 BQ4x10 BQ4x10 E3 E6 BR4x20 T3x6 9 15 4 E4 E4 E4 T3x6 2 E4...

Page 1028: ...pring 6 E 7 347N1261 Spacer 3 8x2 6 D 8 329N7003B Cam 3 E 9 319N7138 Shaft 3 D 10 324N3711B Timing Belt Wheel 1 D 11 333N7000B Reel 4 E 12 401N0749 Brace 4 D 13 383Y0062 Wire 1 D 14 383Y0060 Wire 1 D...

Page 1029: ...8 19 S3x8 E4 1 2 3 3 4 5 7 8 9 4 10 6 4 11 T3x6 E4 12 13 14 34 4 B3x6 15 16 15 17 2 BR4x8 18 4 9 8 7 5 4 3 E4 E4 2 3 4 6 10 20 BR4x20 BR4x20 19 4 8 10 9 10 4 5 3 E4 E4 7 6 4 2 29 30 A4x10 BR4x20 11 22...

Page 1030: ...Wire 1 E 13 401N0749 Brace 4 D 14 333N7000B Reel 4 D 15 322SF017 Bearing 4 WA676ZZA D 16 324N1026A Flat Belt Wheel 2 E 17 319N7137 Shaft 1 E 18 356N6042A Bracket 1 E 19 319N7114A Shaft 3 E 20 347N074...

Page 1031: ...5 11 20 99 FM2638 07C AFTER READING CONVEYOR 3 FR1Z0059 EPS 2 X Y Z Y X Z Q4x12 1 1 1 4 5 5 3 SW4 8 7 6 10 B3x6 3 B3x6 3 BR4x8 2 B3x6 18 11 2 B3x6 10 9 12 16 3 A4x10 15 17 E4 BR4x8 14 13 SW4 8 Q4x12 1...

Page 1032: ...Rubber Roller 2 D 6 322SF012 Bearing 2 FLW688ZZ D 7 329N7006C Cam 1 E 8 318N1700A Bushing 3 4x7 5 D 9 104N0043 Photo Sensor 1 SE1 E 10 356N7419A Bracket 1 E 11 356N7351A Sensor Dog 1 E 12 319N7120B S...

Page 1033: ...05 11 20 99 FM2638 2 A3x10 8 9 8 9 2 A3x10 2 B3x6 10 B3x6 BR4x8 13 2 BR4x8 2 B3x6 12 11 9 2 A3x10 14 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E6 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 16 16 16 16 15 FR1Z0062 EP...

Page 1034: ...Extension Spring 6 D 4 327N1121608A Spur Gear 12 D 5 322SF061 Bearing 1 SC866ZZNRCS09 1KQ1 E 6 347N0818 Spacer 1 8x5 D 7 324N3038C Timing Belt Wheel 1 E 8 347N1196A Spacer 2 D 9 113Y1038 Board Assemb...

Page 1035: ...9 8 E4 3 4 A4x10 1 SW4 6 4 3 BR4x8 WP4x4 5 2 3 BR4x8 SW4 18 19 18 SW4 20 18 21 22 23 3 BR4x8 E6 12 15 16 17 12 12 15 16 17 15 16 17 12 15 16 17 12 15 16 17 12 E6 E6 15 16 17 14 30 E6 25 E6 E6 SW4 20...

Page 1036: ...ng 1 4x6 5 D 11 324N3121 Timing Belt Wheel 1 D 12 324N3038C Timing Belt Wheel 7 E 13 347N0818 Spacer 1 D 14 322SF061 Bearing 2 SC866ZZNRCS09 1KG1 D 15 388N2385 Extension Spring 6 D 16 360N0339A Housin...

Page 1037: ...009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 Z Y X Z Y X 4 BR3x6 4 B3x6 3 BR4x8 B3x10 2 BR4x12 10 9 8 2 BR4x8 2 S3x6 6 E6 11 4 B3x6 4 B3x6 4 B3x6 19 17 18 14 3 WP4x8 15 16 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 1 2 13 12 7 FR1Z0066 EPS 08C ER...

Page 1038: ...Guide Plate 1 E 6 356N6029A Bracket 1 E 7 356N5960A Bracket 1 D 8 388N2728B Extension Spring 1 E 9 341N0867 Arm 1 D 10 322N0020A Bearing 1 D 11 322SF061 Bearing 1 SC866ZZNR CS09 1KQ1 D 12 107Y0166 So...

Page 1039: ...M2638 X X 4 B3x6 3 4 2 4 B3x6 1 5 6 22 22 4 B3x6 4 B3x6 3 B3x10 7 2 BR4x8 8 2 B3x6 2 BR4x8 20 19 21 2 BQ4x10 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 15 15 18 5 BR4x8 17 16 2 BR4x8 2 S3x6 15 15 BR4x8 10 11 12 12 13 14 9 23 B4...

Page 1040: ...E 8 308S1422610 Sems Screw 2 S M2 6x10 E 9 356N5878A Bracket 1 E 10 356N5866C Bracket 1 E 11 310N0605A Pin 1 D 12 386N0707 Sponge Tape 2 T8xW10xL36 D 13 386N0706 Sponge Tape 1 T8xW10xL164 E 14 356N586...

Page 1041: ...5 23 22 21 20 27 26 19 17 29 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 3 30 2 1 4 5 6 7 Ver B 28 2 BR4x8 4 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 4 B3x45 2 BR4x8 3 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 B3x6 2 BR4x8 BR4x8 16 5 B3x6 2 B3x6 2 A3x4 2 B3x6 18 2...

Page 1042: ...2 356N5892 Bracket 1 D 13 318S3054 Grommet 1 MG 12 5612 E 14 313N0963A Stay 1 D 15 407N0094A Reflective Plate 1 D 16 386N0709 Sponge Tape 2 T8xW10xL27 E 17 356N5868AB Bracket 1 D 18 120Y0074A Socket 1...

Page 1043: ...4 33 35 36 38 31 31 32 32 29 28 30 27 26 25 24 23 21 21 22 20 14 14 19 19 18 17 12 37 20 21 39 21 23 2 BR4x8 BR4x12 B3x6 E6 W8 SW8 Na8 E6 5 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 Na3 Q3x16 BR4x8 Q3x16 Na...

Page 1044: ...153B Rubber Roller Assembly 1 D 16 334Y3154 Rubber Roller Assembly 1 E 17 347N1472C Spacer 1 E 18 363N1747A Guide Plate 1 D 19 309S0025 Washer 2 WW 16 E 20 347N0636 Spacer 2 8x4 D 21 322SF061 Rolling...

Page 1045: ...1 20 99 FM2638 10B SUB SCANNING UNIT 2 FR1Z0073 EPS 13 14 15 16 18 16 19 20 23 22 22 21 20 19 17 15 12 11 10 9 2 BR4x8 E4 B3x6 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x8 4 BR4x8 BR4x8 4 BR4x8 BR4x8 WP3x6 WP3x6 3 B3x6 3 B3x6 B...

Page 1046: ...t 1 E 7 309N0058A Washer 1 D 8 606Y0032B Light collecting Guide Assembly 1 E 9 332N0458B Stopper 1 E 10 356N5802 Bracket 1 D 11 388N1075A Compression Coil Spring 1 E 12 319N3320 Shaft 1 E 13 310N0598...

Page 1047: ...10 10 22 10 22 10 11 21 20 12 18 28 19 17 15 16 14 13 28 2 BR4x8 4 B3x6 3 BR4x8 BR4x8 BR4x10 BR4x10 BR4x10 2 BR4x8 BR6x12 W8 BR6x12 W8 W8 BR6x12 W8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 BR6x12 2 BR4x8 6 BR4x8 2 BR...

Page 1048: ...J K L SCN08A 1 Serial number control is required Serial number control is required E 17 356N5801G Bracket 1 E 18 356N5810C Bracket 1 E 19 356N5811A Bracket 1 D 20 350N1983C Cover 1 E 21 356N5808C Brac...

Page 1049: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 84 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 11 SCANNING OPTICS UNIT FR1Z0077 EPS 1 2 3 4 11 6 7 5 7 6 FR1Z0078 EPS 9 8 10 B3x8 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115...

Page 1050: ...26A Bracket 1 E 9 350N2503A Cover 1 E 10 345N1543A Cover 1 E 11 138S0219 Filter 1 T8xW6xL139 TR1Z0041 EPS 1 If when REF 2 1 is to be replaced this part is not found in stock it should be replaced with...

Page 1051: ...2 25 24 27 20 18 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 3 12 11 10 8 9 3 4 5 3 4 5 3 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x35 2 BR4x35 2 BR4x35 2 BR4x8 BR4x8 6 7 29 28 4 BR4x8 4 BR4x8 4 B3x6 5 BR4x8 4 B3x6 19 2 BR4x8 6 B3x10 2 BR4x8 3 BR4x8 2...

Page 1052: ...39D 021051 YD 702D 6539D 021051A YD 702D 6539D 021051C D 12 352N0383A Panel 1 D 13 113Y7043A Board Assembly 1 E 14 356N5850 Bracket 1 For CSL D 15 1 852S0006A ID Card Reader 1 JIS MCS 1800P 2 For CSL...

Page 1053: ...2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 Tsus4x8 4 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 Tsus4x8 2 BR4x8 BR4x8 2 BR4x8 BR4x8 6 B3x6 Tsus4x8 2 BR4x8 2 B3x6 28 Tsus4x8 30 16 17 18 15 Tsus4x8 Tsus4x8 Tsus4x8 Tsus4x8 19 FR1Z0082 EPS 29 32 Tsus4x...

Page 1054: ...ter 2671 D 12 4 850S0085 HDD 1 Western Digital WDE9100 003 D 12 5 850Y0113 HDD 850Y0112 Bracket 1 SEAGATE ST318416N SEAGATE ST318416N SEAGATE ST318416N CR IR341 2671 3330 CR IR341 3331 D 12 6 850Y0114...

Page 1055: ...tem FD System FD System FD 1 For Formatting 28 2 114Y5431002A 1 For Installation 28 3 114Y5431003A 1 For Data 28 4 114Y5431020A 1 For USA CSL type 29 114Y5431101A BOOT ROM BOOT ROM 1 For CPU90E 30 114...

Page 1056: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 89 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 BLANK PAGE SP 89 2...

Page 1057: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 89 3 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 BLANK PAGE 13...

Page 1058: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 89 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1059: ...P 90 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 13 OPTION RANK REF PART NO PART NAME QTY REMARKS SERIAL NO E 1 1 114Y5431010A PC Menu Editor FD 1 For Overseas CSL type E 1 2 114Y5431010B PC Menu Editor FD 1 For Japan...

Page 1060: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 91 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1061: ...36Y6146A Cable 1 2 10 7 10 E 16 136Y6147A Cable 1 3 10 5 10 E 17 136Y6148A Cable 1 3 10 10 10 E 18 136Y6149A Cable 1 3 10 10 10 E 19 136Y6150A Cable 1 3 10 E 20 136Y6151A Cable 1 3 10 E 21 136Y6152A C...

Page 1062: ...126A Cable 1 2 10 8 10 E 65 136N0276 Cable 1 Power cable Japanese USA 2 10 E 66 136Y6088A Cable 1 6 10 E 67 136Y6095A Cable 1 7 10 E 68 136Y6096A Cable 1 7 10 E 69 136Y6097A Cable 1 7 10 E 70 136Y6098...

Page 1063: ...1A Cable 1 Power cable Japanese 200V Spec cable with round terminals E 98 136Y8368A Cable Serial number control is required 1 E 99 136Y8369B Cable 1 E 100 136Y8370B Cable 1 E 101 136Y8371B Cable 1 E 1...

Page 1064: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 95 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1065: ...al Optional Page Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram Housing Portions with no symbols represent housing Notes on cable codes Housing near the JPS 1 housing U K Hous...

Page 1066: ...ce Manual SP 97 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 15 CONNECTION DIAGRAM FR1Z0084 EPS Housing Housing near the rack Page Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram 009 051 07 08 3...

Page 1067: ...rvice Manual SP 98 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 FR1Z0085 EPS Page Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram Housing Add on optional 15 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 009 051 07 08 30 2...

Page 1068: ...FM2638 FR1Z0086 EPS Page Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram Housing Indent Magnetic card reader Touch panel board Touch panel English Japanese Reserved Display 15...

Page 1069: ...ame Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram Topmost stage shelf 1 Upper middle stage shelf 2 Lower middle stage shelf 3 Lowermost stage shelf 4 Conveyor Unit Erasure Conveyor Unit Pede...

Page 1070: ...9 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 FR1Z0088 EPS Page Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram Side posoitioning Unit After reading conveyor Unit Subscanning Unit 15 CONNECTION DIA...

Page 1071: ...38 FR1Z0089 EPS Setting Unit Elevation Unit Conveyor Unit Erasure Conveyor Unit Lamp house Elevation unit Elevation side plate Page Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diag...

Page 1072: ...Unit Model Name Code Sup name Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Connection Diagram Side positioning Unit Side positioning Unit Scanner Unit Platform Scanner Unit Platform After reading Unit After reading Unit S...

Page 1073: ...ptics Unit Subscanning Unit Subscanning side plate Subscanning side plate Scanner unit platform Scanner unit platform Scanner unit platform After conveyor unit Scanner unit platform Subscanning side p...

Page 1074: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 105 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1075: ...118YX700 10A 27 119Y1097 09 6 119Y1107 12A 4 119Y1119 02B 11 119Y1700 12A 2 120Y0074A 09 18 120Y0075A 09 24 123N0006 09 23 124Y0045C 11 5 2 124Y7000B 11 5 1 125N0094G 02B 10 128S0392 04B 9 128Y0200 12...

Page 1076: ...9 305N0014A 05B 9 305N0014A 06E 16 305N0014A 08B 29 305N0037 09 22 308S1422610 02A 19 308S1422610 03A 11 308S1422610 04G 16 308S1422610 06A 4 308S1422610 08D 8 308S1422614 04B 10 308S1422614 04D 17 30...

Page 1077: ...0024A 01C 23 322N0028A 04A 12 322N0033 02B 35 322SF002 10A 9 322SF004 06A 8 322SF004 06B 7 322SF004 07A 4 322SF004 07B 10 322SF012 06D 13 322SF012 07C 6 322SF017 04D 24 322SF017 04E 3 322SF017 05A 4 3...

Page 1078: ...3B 06A 40 329N0133 10B 18 329N0134 10B 17 329N7003B 06A 12 329N7003B 06B 4 329N7003B 07A 8 329N7003B 07B 5 329N7005D 06D 14 329N7005D 07C 20 329N7006C 06D 15 329N7006C 07C 7 332N0456B 10C 14 332N0458B...

Page 1079: ...5A 10 347N0818 05B 12 347N0818 08A 6 347N0818 08B 13 347N0821 05E 8 347N0831 04B 38 347N0832 05A 8 347N0834 04E 15 347N1174 05A 29 347N1174 08A 14 347N1196A 04D 16 347N1196A 05A 27 347N1196A 06A 28 34...

Page 1080: ...0C 10C 18 356N5811A 10C 19 356N5813A B 04B 41 356N5814A 04E 2 356N5815B 04F 4 356N5816B 04A 28 356N5817C 04B 6 1 356N5818A 04A 42 356N5819B 04A 38 356N5821A 04B 35 356N5823A 04G 21 356N5824B 04A 44 35...

Page 1081: ...356N7351A 06D 4 356N7351A 07C 11 356N7383B 06D 1 1 356N7384B 06B 34 356N7385D 07B 31 356N7389A 01C 5 356N7390A 01C 6 356N7391B 06A 2 1 356N7419A 06D 9 356N7419A 07C 10 356N8285 12B 34 356N8286 12B 35...

Page 1082: ...33 382N0971 01B 31 382N0972 01B 34 382N0973 01B 35 382N0974 02B 23 382N0975 01B 12 382N0975 02B 22 382N0976 02B 25 382N0977 02B 17 382N0978 02B 18 382N0979 02B 20 382N0980 01A 27 382N0981 01A 26 382N...

Page 1083: ...A 09 20 388N5214 03C 15 388N5244A 01A 39 388N5244A 01B 8 388N5703A 01A 4 392N0010 04C 16 398N0057D 03A 18 401N0734A 10A 6 401N0735A 10A 7 401N0737 08D 21 401N0738A B 08D 20 401N0740 04G 17 401N0741 04...

Page 1084: ...CR IR341 Service Manual SP 115 009 051 05 11 20 99 FM2638 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1085: ...nd plain washers BR BR 4 x 25 M4 x 25 6 Hexagon headed bolt Q Q3 x 20 M3 x 20 7 Hexagon Headed bolt with spring and plain washer BQ BQ4 x 10 M4 x 10 8 Hexagon headed setscrew WP WP4 x 6 M4 x 6 double...

Page 1086: ...05 11 20 99 FM2638 LIST OF QUICK WEARING PARTS 18 List Of Quick Wearing Parts No Part name Shape 1 Fixing plug 2 Binding band 3 N K clamp 4 Edging 5 Edge saddle TR1Z1000 EPS 1 Fixing plug 2 Binding b...

Page 1087: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Preventive Maintenance PM...

Page 1088: ...k Absorbers of Vertical Conveyor PM 29 3 15 Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit PM 31 3 16 Pushing in Tray of Cassette Set Unit PM 32 3 17 Checking Shock Absorbers of Before Side Positioning Conveyor PM 33...

Page 1089: ...2 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 0 2 Contents Preventive Maintenance 3 33 Clearing Error Log PM 84 3 34 Turning ON High Voltage Switch Software Switch PM 85 3 35 Checking Image PM 86 4 Maintenance to Be P...

Page 1090: ...M3115 PM 1 Control Sheet Revision number Reason Pages affected Issue date 05 31 99 04 Corrections due to change in configuration All pages FM2460 11 20 99 05 Corrections FM2638 PM 1 2 5 41 44 04 20 20...

Page 1091: ...onveyor 1Y 3 15 Reinstalling Cassette Set Unit 1Y 3 16 Pushing in Tray of Cassette Set Unit 1Y 3 17 Checking Shock Absorbers of Before Side Positioning Conveyor 1Y Cleaning roller 334N5004B x1 3 18 Re...

Page 1092: ...CR IR341 Service Manual PM 3 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 PM 3 2 3 4 1 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1093: ...card reader Checking Error Log In M Utility check to see that there is no error Checking Image Uniformly expose an IP at about 1 mR and generate image output in the test menu of the IDT to check the i...

Page 1094: ...u of the IDT to check the image on output film for any abnormality Checking and Cleaning Subscanning Unit Belts Check and clean the SUS rubber and Kapton belts Procedures performed at intervals of 0 5...

Page 1095: ...hat the procedures should be performed at intervals of 3Y three years 3 1 Checking Error Log Procedures 1 Power ON the machine 2 Touch the USER UTILITY BUTTON The screen switches to the User Utility m...

Page 1096: ...lows Distance 1 8 m Voltage 80 kV Amperage 50 mA Time 0 013 sec 2 Make recording in SENSITIVITY from the test menu of the IDT and generate output 3 Make sure that the resulting image is free from unun...

Page 1097: ...24cm The IP exposure conditions are as follows Distance 1 8 m Voltage 80 kV Amperage 50 mA Time 0 013 sec How to expose the steel rules is illustrated below 2 Make recording in SENSITIVITY from the te...

Page 1098: ...ate 3 Abnormal Images in Troubleshooting Image frame White blank 2mm or less FR1H1011 EPS 1 2 2 3 1 2 2 3 2 3 1 1 6 7 1 1 TR1H1001 EPS e z i s g n i d a e R e n o n i o w T e g a m i e g a m i l l u F...

Page 1099: ...titution name b IP number c EDR mode and menu code d System ID and image number e Image processing conditions f Exposure menu name g Standardization conditions and amendments h Engineer code and expos...

Page 1100: ...x 17 8 x 10 four image output Image Image Image Image FR1B1123 EPS FR1B1124 EPS A Image Image B Image Image Four image output of a size other than 14 x 17 8 x 10 18 x 43 long two image output B4LP A B...

Page 1101: ...gnetic card reader is described below respectively Cleaning the FD drive 1 Power ON the machine 2 Insert the FD drive cleaner into the FD drive The drive starts to read the FD but stops in error 3 Rem...

Page 1102: ...ation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 3 Select 9 HV OFF The high voltage switch is set to OFF displayed on screen and 9 HV OFF displayed switches to 9 HV ON 1Y 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CO...

Page 1103: ...ile slightly pulling the top of the cover toward yourself pull it up and out exercising care to prevent the cover of the switch portion from hitting the power supply unit Because the three screws on t...

Page 1104: ...nfuse these screws during installation 11 Stack table truss M4x6 x2 Using a 2 mm Allen wrench or so forth first remove the screw covers and then the screws 12 Lower front inner cover BR M4x8 x8 13 Mul...

Page 1105: ...tached to the filter cover and pull it off 2Y 3 Attach a new air filter to the filter cover Fit the air filter firmly into the four corners of the filter cover 4 Reinstall the filter cover removed at...

Page 1106: ...e screw BR M4x8 that retains the tensioner to slide the tensioner as appropriate and then secure the tensioner in place 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description 3 Remove t...

Page 1107: ...out the cassette set unit horizontally NOTES When pulling out the cassette set unit be sure to move the up down IP removal assembly to its home position or to any of the first through fourth shelf po...

Page 1108: ...dures 1 Pull out the IP removal arm toward the front NOTE When pulling out the IP removal arm do not grasp its center If its center is grasped the IP removal arm may be bent 2 Wipe the suction face of...

Page 1109: ...Suction Cups Periodically Replaced Parts Suction cups Procedures 1 Pull out the IP removal arm toward the front NOTE When pulling out the IP removal arm do not grasp its center If its center is graspe...

Page 1110: ...ate the suction cup retaining screws while holding the suction cup rubber portions Rotate the suction cup retaining screws with a thin blade screwdriver while holding the pipe joint with a wrench or l...

Page 1111: ...Pump PB1 Procedures 1 Rotate the timing belt until the IP removal unit is moved up away about 250 mm from the tray of the cassette set unit to facilitate PB1 removal 2 Cut the cable clamp 3 Remove the...

Page 1112: ...cable tie cut at step 4 10 Attach the hose removed at step 6 NOTE When attaching the hose connect it to the suction nozzle upper one of the two nozzles arranged of the PB1 Suction nozzle Hose FR1H1496...

Page 1113: ...of preventive maintenance 3 Remove the spring from the wire 4 Remove the wire from the roller 5 Remove the left roller assembly from the shock absorber attached guide plate 6 Remove the four screws tw...

Page 1114: ...bsorber attached guide plate C and take out the shock absorber attached guide plate C from the stay Shock absorber attached guide plate A Shock absorber attached guide plate B Shock absorber attached...

Page 1115: ...not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide to which the shock absorber is at tached 3 Install new shock absorber attached guides Fit the lower portion of the guide into the...

Page 1116: ...chine the three screws that retain the shock absorber attached guide plate FRONT Vertical conveyor FR1H1483 EPS Shock absorber attached guide plate BR M4x8 x3 Rear of IP removal unit Rear of machine 2...

Page 1117: ...of the machine Procedures 1 Remove the shock absorber attached guide plate 2 Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide plate to which the sh...

Page 1118: ...ntive maintenance 2 Remove the spring of the up down changeover guide 3 Remove the single screw that retains the up down changeover guide to the arm Using a Phillips stubby screwdriver or the like rem...

Page 1119: ...s removed at step 6 10 From the front side of the machine reinstall both the right and left E rings removed at step 5 First install the E ring on the right hand side of the machine 11 Reinstall the ar...

Page 1120: ...tte set unit into the machine align it along the positioning brackets If not the sensor may be damaged When installing the cassette set unit push it against the positioning brackets for proper positio...

Page 1121: ...y of the cassette set unit 2 Secure the tray of the cassette set unit with two screws 3 Connect the connectors CNA1 3 to the cassette set unit CNB1 3 4 to the up down IP removal unit SUPPLEMENTARY NOT...

Page 1122: ...can be removed Loosen the one retaining screw and slide the tensioner as appropriate and then tighten the screw 3 4 Tensioner Not Requiring Tension Adjustment in Machine Description 3 Remove the timin...

Page 1123: ...ed replace the whole guide to which the shock absorber is at tached 12 Install the guide plate 13 Tighten the screw loosened at step 7 SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE The cover removed at step 6 should be reinstal...

Page 1124: ...the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is attached If it is not peeled or frayed proceed to step 12 3 Remove the spring 4 Remove the arm 5 Remove the bearing 6 Remove the shock absorber att...

Page 1125: ...the arm pushed against the flat ma chined surface Flat machined surface Arm Sems M3x10 FR1H1437 EPS 8 Adjust the mounting position of the convergence path changeover guide drive solenoid SOLC1 so tha...

Page 1126: ...ore side positioning retention guide assembly to the side positioning conveyor NOTES When installing the shafts position their grooves on the right hand side of the ma chine When installing the before...

Page 1127: ...16 Put the tensioner back where it was originally located Loosen the single screw that retains the tensioner Flick the timing belt several times to ensure that it snugly fits onto the timing belt whee...

Page 1128: ...yor 2 Pull out the cleaning roller assembly horizontally 2Y 3 Remove the bracket Loosen the four screws both right and left of the cleaning roller assembly and take out the bracket 4 Remove the cleani...

Page 1129: ...lean ing roller 7 Attach the plain washer two spacers two slide bearings and E ring removed at step 6 to a new cleaning roller 8 Reinstall the cleaning roller to the cleaning roller assembly 9 Reinsta...

Page 1130: ...ace within the erasure lamp assembly the white reflection face behind the bracket and the five erasure lamps with a moistened cloth wrung tightly 7 Install five new erasure lamps 8 Reinstall the brack...

Page 1131: ...ut the erasure conveyor horizontally FRONT CNSOLF1 CNF1 CNF2 Shock absorber attached guide plate Shock absorber attached guide plate Shock absorber attached branch path changeover guide Erasure convey...

Page 1132: ...ion face 1 2 3 20 Replacing Erasure Lamps Periodically Replaced Parts Erasure lamp Procedures 1 Install five new erasure lamps to the erasure lamp assembly 2 Reinstall the bracket SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE T...

Page 1133: ...Remove the shock absorber attached guide plate 2 Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide to which the shock absorber is at tached 3 Reinst...

Page 1134: ...k if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole filter to which the shock absorber is at tached If it is not peeled or frayed proceed to step 7 5 Remove the...

Page 1135: ...bsorber located above erasure conveyor 1 Disconnect the connector CNSF4 2 Remove the SF4 together with the spacer 3 Disconnect the connector CNSF2 4 Remove the SF2 together with the bracket Erasure co...

Page 1136: ...r is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide to which the shock absorber is attached 7 Install the shock absorber attached guide plate 8 Reinstall the SF2 together with the bracket 9 Connect the conn...

Page 1137: ...orber is at tached If it is not peeled or frayed reinstall it in the reverse order of removal FRONT Erasure conveyor Guide plate BR M3x6 x4 Shock absorber attached branch path changeover guide FR1H145...

Page 1138: ...nd slide bearing removed at step 8 to a new shock ab sorber attached branch path changeover guide 10 Fit the spring pin into the U shaped groove of the arm 11 Reinstall the branch path changeover guid...

Page 1139: ...gether with the connector which was removed at step 5 15 Attach the spring removed at step 3 Spring pin Arm Square hole Bearing Changeover guide driving solenoid SF1 Branch path changeover guide assem...

Page 1140: ...m the shock absorber attached cover 3 Check if the shock absorber is peeled or frayed If the shock absorber is peeled or frayed replace the whole cover to which the shock absorber is attached 1Y FRONT...

Page 1141: ...en the single screw that retains the tensioner Flick the timing belt several times to ensure that it snugly fits onto the timing belt wheel and then tighten the screw on the tensioner in place where a...

Page 1142: ...be broken so you may get injured SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE When inserting the erasure lamp assembly align the positioning pin located on the right hand side of the inlet into the hole of the erasure lamp as...

Page 1143: ...ve dust deposited on the transparent cover 2 While rotating the drive shaft check the SUS belt rubber belt pulley and tensioner for any soil or flaw If any soil is found clean it off SUS belt Clean an...

Page 1144: ...Rubber belt SUS belt Drive shaft Subsacnning unit FR1H1460 EPS FRONT 4 3 4 5 Install new SUS and rubber belts in the reverse order of removal NOTES After replacing the SUS or rubber belt rotate the d...

Page 1145: ...flaw is found proceed to step 3 FRONT Kapton belt Subscanning unit Left hand side transparent cover BR M4x8 x2 FR1H1461 EPS 2 1 3 Remove the tensioner spring 4 Remove the Kapton belt 5 Install new Kap...

Page 1146: ...A and B Check that both A and B measure 43 mm 1 3 and that the difference between measurements A and B is not greater than 1 mm 1Y 2 With a 150 mm scale take measurements C and D Check that both C and...

Page 1147: ...ervicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on t...

Page 1148: ...bracket located on the upper portion of the SCN08A board 3 Remove the two screws that retain the scanner unit 4 Pull out the scanner unit NOTE When pulling out the scanner unit use care so that it is...

Page 1149: ...t the removed light collecting guide assembly down onto a soft sheet or the like using care not to damage it CAUTIONS Wear gloves when handling the light collecting guide assembly If you handle it wit...

Page 1150: ...alf and wipe the entire light collecting guide with the sheets moistened with ethanol CAUTIONS Wipe the light collecting guide in one direction at a constant rate Do not wipe the photomultiplier bondi...

Page 1151: ...ition of the sockets of the PMT08A board and light collecting guide as appropriate CAUTIONS Wear gloves when handling the light collecting guide assembly If it is handled with bare hands the light col...

Page 1152: ...en you wear gloves Carefully handle the light collecting mirror to avoid damage to it due to contact with surrounding objects Wear a mask so as not to inadvertently spit on the light collecting mirror...

Page 1153: ...he two light collecting mirror retaining screws 7 Remove the light collecting mirror Grasp the take out screws and remove the light collecting mirror while using care to avoid contact with surrounding...

Page 1154: ...out screws M3 12 Install the dust cover While pressing the dust cover lower sponge against the light collecting mirror bracket push the upper sponge into the scanning optics unit with your fingers SU...

Page 1155: ...rocedures 1 Remove the shock absorber attached guide plate 2 Check if the shock absorber is not peeled or frayed If peeled or frayed replace the whole guide plate on which the shock absorber is attach...

Page 1156: ...tightening the two screws in order from 5 1 to 5 2 as illustrated below 6 Make sure that the three bumps two bumps on the right hand side and one of the two bumps on the left hand side are aligned aga...

Page 1157: ...racket of the after reading conveyor If both of the two bumps on the left side are detached from the block section of the subscanning unit loosen the three screws and repeat step 7 all over again 8 Co...

Page 1158: ...ecting guide assembly align the protrusions located at both ends of the light receiving face of the light collecting guide assembly against the reference plane in the subscanning direction and the fro...

Page 1159: ...ushed the arm itself may be deformed 11 Secure the light collecting guide assembly in place with the brace CAUTION If the light collecting guide assembly leaves its fixed position i e position as in s...

Page 1160: ...osition of the sockets of the PMT08A board and light collecting guide as appropriate After the brace is fixed with the screw verify again that the sockets are parallel and then proceed to the next ste...

Page 1161: ...CNMD1 3 2 Remove the five screws that retain the side positioning conveyor 3 Pull out the side positioning conveyor horizontally NOTE Make sure that the scanner unit has been pulled all the way out If...

Page 1162: ...ot peeled or frayed If it is peeled or frayed replace the whole guide plate to which the shock absorber is attached FRONT Shock absorber attached guide plate Sems M3x6 x3 FR1H1477 EPS Shock absorber a...

Page 1163: ...g conveyor in place with five screws NOTE Make sure that the scanner unit has been pulled all the way out If not the MD3 will interfere with the machine frame when installing the side positioning conv...

Page 1164: ...may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board Push In 1 While pushing the stopper located on the front side of the machine put the scanner unit back into the machine until the stopper locat...

Page 1165: ...SCN08A board in place with two screws 4 Secure the scanner unit in place with two screws 5 Connect the connectors CN7 9 CNZ6 8 10 to the SCN08A board CNZ1 2 4 5 to the subscanning unit FRONT 4 3 5 5 S...

Page 1166: ...ing conveyor Take out the before side positioning conveyor before cleaning the rollers 3 17 Checking Shock Absorbers of Before Side Positioning Conveyor Six rubber rollers at side positioning conveyor...

Page 1167: ...ning unit Z Scanning optics unit Power supply unit Controller FR1H1046 EPS FRONT Vertical conveyor B IP removal unit B Light collecting guide assembly After reading conveyor E Erasure conveyor F NOTES...

Page 1168: ...h of the SCN08A board is in the ON position NOTE Accomplish positioning at the time of multi stage cassette loading cover installation If you do not complete positioning a cassette holding failure may...

Page 1169: ...the multi stage cassette loading cover until the distance between the entry reference guide protrusion of the cassette set unit and the scale is 0 5 1 mm and then tighten the four screws that were loo...

Page 1170: ...9 2011 to 2013 2015 to 2019 and 2021 to 2027 Because of parts machining precision the multi stage cassette loading cover may be slightly warped when secured though this will not pose any problem Align...

Page 1171: ...ility screen Deleting images waiting for processing Processed image reproduction output Click sound Date time setup FD operation Touch panel parallax correction Multiframe forced output Printer select...

Page 1172: ...key to confirm the setting When the setting is confirmed OK appears below the entry line If the date or time is entered incorrectly press the BS backspace key to return to the character to be correcte...

Page 1173: ...1 Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 2 Select 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY and 2 CLEAR in sequence 3 Select 1 YES The entire error log...

Page 1174: ...TY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING Display in ON status FR1H1417 EPS 3 34 Turning ON High Voltage Switch Software Switch Procedures 9 HV OFF is displayed when the high voltage switch is in th...

Page 1175: ...CR IR341 Service Manual PM 86 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 2 3 4 1 CONTENTS PM 86 0 5Y 3 35 Checking Image Procedures 3 2 Checking Images...

Page 1176: ...CR IR341 Service Manual PM 87 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 PM 87 2 3 4 1 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1177: ...CR IR341 Service Manual PM 88 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 2 3 4 1 CONTENTS PM 88 4 Maintenance to Be Performed in 6 Years Being prepared...

Page 1178: ...CR IR341 Service Manual PM 89 009 051 04 05 31 99 FM2460 PM 89 2 3 4 1 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1179: ...CR IR341 CR IR341P Service Manual Installation IN...

Page 1180: ...FG IN 22 3 1 1 List of Setup Items of SYSTEM IRSET CFG IN 24 3 1 2 Setup Items of SYSTEM to be Changed for Second and Subsequent Machines IN 35 2 3 2 PRINT FILMFMT CFG IN 35 3 3 2 1 Setup Items of PRI...

Page 1181: ...91 6 2 4 Procedures at Side Positioning Conveyor Subscanning Unit and Power Supply Unit IN 93 6 2 5 Procedures at Scanner Unit IN 98 6 2 6 Procedures at Controller IN 108 6 2 7 Unclamping Check List I...

Page 1182: ...ne IN 153 8 Final Installation and Checks IN 154 8 1 Checking IP Conveyance in M Utility IN 154 8 2 Reinstalling Covers IN 157 8 3 Final Placement IN 158 8 4 Checks after Machine Startup IN 161 8 5 Ch...

Page 1183: ...it M Utility IN_A3 3 Appendix 3 3 Common Operations in M Utility IN_A3 4 Appendix 3 3 1 How to Select Menu IN_A3 4 Appendix 3 3 2 How to Quit Menu IN_A3 5 Appendix 3 3 3 How to Enter Numeral Value IN_...

Page 1184: ...IN 1 3 1 3 4 12 13 13 1 13 2 14 17 21 21 1 21 2 22 23 25 28 30 34 35 43 47 50 52 68 70 85 87 122 135 137 138 140 141 143 144 149 IN_A2 All pages 04 20 2001 06 Corrections FM3006 IN 4 5 16 17 23 23 1...

Page 1185: ...described in sequence Appendix 1 provides an original of worksheet so that check items described in Chapters 2 through 4 should be filled in a copy of this worksheet It is assumed in Chapters 5 throug...

Page 1186: ...ation perform the proce dures described in Chapter 7 Setting Configuration File First machine Copy Copy Second and subsequent machines W o r k s h e e t Appendix of INSTALLATION Volume W o r k s h e e...

Page 1187: ...START A 4 Preparation for Installation Environment 4 1 Specifications of Machine 4 2 Preinstallation Work 4 3 Tools Used A END Appendix 1 Worksheet for Determination of System Configuration Appendix...

Page 1188: ...nveyor Subscanning Unit and Power Supply Unit 6 1 Work Flow A START 6 3 1 MTH08A board 6 3 2 MMC90A board 6 3 3 CPU90E board 6 3 4 IMG07B board 6 3 5 CPU90F board or LAN90B board 6 3 6 HCP08A board 6...

Page 1189: ...rtup 8 5 Checking Interface Operation 8 6 Checking Image and Adjusting Image Requirements 8 8 Checking Machine Shutdown 8 9 Cleaning Covers 8 10 Attachment of Labels B 7 Setting Configuration File 8 F...

Page 1190: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 7 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 7 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1191: ...dels of the printers that can be directly connected to the CR IR341 by use of the E I F board and their software versions are shown below It should be noted that ULP in the configuration is automatica...

Page 1192: ...dels of the DMS units that can be directly connected to the CR IR341 by use of the E I F board and their software versions are shown below Model Software version ODF 613 No restriction ODF 623 No rest...

Page 1193: ...version specified below PART NO Software version 113Y7038B A05 06 113Y7038E A07 or later The multi frequency processing function is automatically activated by installing the IMG08B board Thus it is u...

Page 1194: ...U90E board via a network 10BASE T System configuration pattern 1 The DMS is connected to the DMC08A board System configuration pattern 2 The DMS is connected to the CPU90F board via a network 100BASE...

Page 1195: ...Switch setting Communication mode CPU90E board 10BASE T HALF DUPLEX 10M HALF DUPLEX 10BASE T 10BASE T 100 BASE TX selection 10BASE T 10BASE T 100 BASE TX selection 10M HALF DUPLEX 10M HALF DUPLEX AUT...

Page 1196: ...41 DMC08A IMG08A HUB 10BASE T Remote power ON OFF ID data IDT IV No 4 IDT IV No 5 IDT IV No 6 PRINTER e g FL IM D DMS e g HIC654 DMS e g OD F614 FR1B1128 EPS System Configuration Pattern 2 The DMS is...

Page 1197: ...twork 100BASE TX Because the IDT IV can be used exclusively over 10BASE T it should be connected through a 100M 10M bridge HI C655 OD F614 IDT IV ROUTER IDT IV IDT IV IDT IV IDT IV HUB 10BASE T or 100...

Page 1198: ...U90E Remote power ON OFF System configuration example 5 Both of the IDT IV and DMS are connected to the CPU90F board via a network The use of a 100M 10M switching hub permits the IDT IV and DMS to exc...

Page 1199: ...rch Logic and IDT Registration In order to receive ID information from the IDT IV the IDT IV should be registered in the CR IR341 Up to five units of the IDT IV can be registered and ID inquiries are...

Page 1200: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 15 2 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 15 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1201: ...s The configuration information is contained in multiple configuration files Names of the configuration files and a summary of their setup are shown below 3 1 SYSTEM IRSET CFG It contains overall setu...

Page 1202: ...DDRESS HOSTS It contains information regarding the correspondence between the name and IP address of a host that is connected to the machine to send and receive data 3 8 DISTRIBUTION CODEDSTB It conta...

Page 1203: ...switches to U Utility 3 Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated Area to be touched FR1B1086 EPS Routine screen screen made to CSL specif...

Page 1204: ...AT IMAGE PARTITION 3 BACK UP 4 RESTORE 5 EDR DATA 6 PREVIOUS SYSTEM SOFTWARE 7 EXECUTION FUT 3 0 QUIT 1 SCANNER DATA 2 CONFIGURATION DATA 3 NETWORK DATA 4 IMAGE PROCESSING DATA 5 CSL MENU DATA FUT RES...

Page 1205: ...EPS 0 SP D E F A B C 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 DEL BS ENT Caps Of the setup files the following files are saved to the floppy disk REMOTE SWITCH RMT_SW CFG EQUIPMENT EQUIP NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEVICE HOSTS...

Page 1206: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 21 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 21 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS Editing Configuration File on PC Using an editor software program on the PC edit the configuration file...

Page 1207: ...method CSL Type 28 EXAM_PADDING Examination No Padding method CSL Type 27 EXAM_LENGTH Examination No Length CSL Type 29 IFT Reserve 30 PRO Function Protect 32 SF2 Read Sensitivity High 31 SF1 Read Se...

Page 1208: ...the LENGTH digits requirements specified for the following items If a wrong LENGTH is used the setup results in error so that the machine may not operate prop erly 3 IPS IP Address CPU90E Length 15 4...

Page 1209: ...nge prohibited 8 SID A Reader number A reader number that does not duplicate within the same network should be assigned A Z 9 SFC 0 Manual sensitivity setup menu setup 0 OFF 1 ON Standard Semi High Sp...

Page 1210: ...S 0 ID 1 ID RECEPT 2 ID EXAM 3 ID RECEPT EXAM 0 DISABLE 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON ON TR1B1106 EPS 23 10 Setting of ID number character string length 1 10 ID_INFO_TYPE 0 1 64 ID_INFO_TYPE 1 24 Setting of ID nu...

Page 1211: ...pt number padding scheme 0 0 Pad with space to the head Ex 123 1 Pad with zero to the head Ex 00123 2 Pad with space to the tail Ex 123 3 Pad with zero to the tail Ex 12300 28 Setting of examination n...

Page 1212: ...e 4 film mark 6 7 department name 4 MPM 4 space 2 34 PTR 0 Position of film mark or menu character string outputted with GRP valid when GRP 2 3 6 0 F hexadecimal notation 35 UNQ 0 Unique information s...

Page 1213: ...the QA side 0 org root 2 0 Private Image UID IDT Type 0 org root 2 1 MAC Address Time Stamp Unique ID CSL Type 1 org root 2 1 Accesion Number 2 org root 2 2 Study Date Modality CR Accesion Number 3 or...

Page 1214: ...l EX 12340000 2 Patient information acquisition setting during ID online ID_ RET 0 55 Study Series information numbering setting UID CSL type 0 Study Series information is not numbered on the reader s...

Page 1215: ...in FINP patient name in languages other than Japanese PN_FDS 0 Space 1 Caret 2 Comma 0 65 Setting of delimiter for patient name components in FINP patient name in Japanese language PN_FDM 0 Space 1 C...

Page 1216: ...s in FINP PN_ FCM3 F Family name G Given name M Middle name P Prefix S Suffix FGM 74 Setting of multi byte patient name components for four components in FINP PN_ FCM4 F Family name G Given name M Mid...

Page 1217: ...que non duplicate IP address over the single network and change it to that address Typically because the IP address is also determined as the system configuration is determined the IP address assigned...

Page 1218: ...IX SEMI X can be selected 2 AUTO SEMI FIX SEMI X MANUAL can be selected 18 ID_FILING selection menu for image resolution during OD F filing The menu for selecting the image resolution during OD F fili...

Page 1219: ...e set according to the character code used for the patient ID CP850 Character code specified by IBM It includes special characters such as umlaut used in Europe ISO8859 1 Character code specified by I...

Page 1220: ...PN_FDS 0 Space is handled as a delimiter PN_FDM 0 Full width space is handled as a delimiter for a patient name in Kanji PN_FCS1 F PN_FCS2 FG PN_FCS3 FGM PN_FCS4 FGMP PN_FCS5 FGMPS PN_FCS1 through PN...

Page 1221: ...the delimiter is a half width space PN_FCM1 F PN_FCM2 FG PN_FCM3 FGM PN_FCM4 FGMP PN_FCM5 FGMPS PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 set components of a name double byte If PN_FCM1 through PN_FCM5 are set as desc...

Page 1222: ...ing can be achieved by copying the configuration files of the first machine and installing them to the second and subsequent machines Items to be Changed when Second and Subsequent Machines are Instal...

Page 1223: ...ion rotation 35 FD1008 14 17 14 14 B4 8 10 film character field position rotation 35 FD1843 14 17 14 14 B4 8 10 film character field position rotation 24 OS DR compression in reprint 26 CE Print 14 17...

Page 1224: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 35 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 35 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1225: ...0 8140 Institution name in Kanji S JIS 30 Bytes up to 15 Kanji characters 8 GF 1 Set processing information display switching 0 NO 1 YES 9 GJ 0 Indent 0 NO 1 YES 10 MF 1 Menu character string display...

Page 1226: ...2 174 0 1mm 31 CLX0 980 Horizontal size for large size area 0 2 980 0 1mm 32 CLY0 268 Vertical size for large size area 0 2 268 0 1mm 33 CLX1 668 Horizontal size for large size area 1 2 668 0 1mm 34 C...

Page 1227: ...ecific MPM code 8 max areas Area position rotation designation MPM1 MPM2 MPM8 XXXX 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 7890 8901 XXXX 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 6789 7890 8901 XXXX 1234 2345 3456 4567 5678 67...

Page 1228: ...than mammo type The four sides of the IP image for ST is trimmed 15 CL date display type A display sample is indicated 17 FR1 14 x17 14 x14 18 43 single image frame display The frame is not displayed...

Page 1229: ...ters complies with the selection in 47 JSTFY of SYSTEM IRSET CFG SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE The long type format function is intended to extend the number of characters outputted to the HI C655QA film and ope...

Page 1230: ...ng EDR mode 03012246 0200 1 0G 1 6 0 20 80KV10mAs XX 22 0200 3V1 0 4R0 5 2 0 1 0 1 0 20000 FR1B1244 EPS Detailed Explanation about Area Indication Of the setup items of PRINT the area indication which...

Page 1231: ...rea size The standard size is designated with 27 CSX0 28 CSY0 29 CSX1 and 30 CSY1 Area 0 CSX0 CSY0 Area 1 CSX1 CSY1 FR1B1245 EPS For large size Designated with items 31 CLX0 32 CLY0 33 CLX1 and 34 CLY...

Page 1232: ...at may be set with items FC1 through FC4 denotes any letter from 0 to F Example 123 Represents a MPM code from 1230 to 123F Setting procedures Position for area 1 0 upper left 1 upper right 2 lower le...

Page 1233: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 41 3 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 41 3 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1234: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 41 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 41 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1235: ...A hub that complies with SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Format IP address root parameter IP address IP address IP address that is set in the HOSTS file 3 7 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS Parameter When...

Page 1236: ...and DISPLAY the output designa tion can be designated by user setting With the CR IR341 the number of hosts that may be set for one function is restricted as follows IDT Up to five IDTs PRINT LOCAL a...

Page 1237: ...ample OD_FILE Network connected to odf624 DISPLAY Network connections to hic654 and hic655 multiple connections PRINT LOCAL connection and network connected to fn ps551 IDT Network connected to fcridt...

Page 1238: ...mation for communication requirements over serial line connection No change is necessary because the initial value is used as is NOTE Only if the CR LP414N FL IM2636N or FL IM3543N is connected to the...

Page 1239: ...ing them by PRINT Film output enabled HD_FILE Active file enabled DISPLAY Display function OD_FILE Archive file enabled Protocol ID protocol identification number It is set in four hexadecimal digits...

Page 1240: ...with the system code and transfer speed omitted fn ps551 setup content Attributes of display function DISPLAY and film output enabled PRINT are set The protocol is set to FINP with the system code an...

Page 1241: ...341 machine be sure to assign both a standard LAN IP address CPU90E and a LAN board IP address CPU90F Example 172 16 0 1 fcr5000a CR IR341 1 CPU90E 172 16 0 2 fcr5000a 1 CR IR341 1 CPU90F Be sure to m...

Page 1242: ...PS551 1 unit An example of description bold faced for the above setup is presented below HOSTS Host Name Max 10 characters Available Character a z 0 9 37chars IP Addr Host Name 172 16 0 1 fcr5000a 172...

Page 1243: ...s a space denotes a space Code distribution destination code A distribution destination code is set in eight alphanumeric characters or denotes a match with any one character Host Name host name The h...

Page 1244: ...ted when Host IP IP address of router is set Host IP IP address of router Host IP may be omitted when Host Name that is set in the HOST file is set Seg Size TCP segment size The TCP segment size is se...

Page 1245: ...s a decimal numeral ranging from 0 to 255 and the bit of the portion handled as the network number is set to 1 while the bit of the portion handled as the host number is set to 0 It is classified into...

Page 1246: ...6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS Setup Example Network 172 16 0 0 netmask 255 255 255 0 An example of description bold faced for the above setup is presented below Network masks database only non default subne...

Page 1247: ...may be designated for connected equipment OD_FILE and DISPLAY respectively OD_FILE 1 DISPLAY 1 Up to one LOCAL and one host name may be designated for PRINT LOCAL 1 host name 1 For IDT up to five host...

Page 1248: ...the router address within the network and the IP address for network connection Dst Addr host name Host IP Seg Size Win Size Delay Timer Rate Dst Addr For the transfer destination IP address a transf...

Page 1249: ...be registered so that the configuration file can easily copied and restored to other units A example of description bold faced for the above setup is presented below REMOTE SWITCH RMT_SW CFG RMT_SW C...

Page 1250: ...ame 172 16 0 1 fcr5000a 172 16 0 2 fcr5000a 1 172 16 0 11 fcr5000b 172 16 0 12 fcr5000b 1 172 16 0 21 fcridt4 1 172 16 0 22 fcridt4 2 172 16 0 101 hic654 172 16 0 102 odf624 172 16 0 103 fn ps551 DIST...

Page 1251: ...ering the output from the image reader to the printer set LOCAL_R as the PRINT attribute DISPLAY qa ws1 PRINT LOCAL_R NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEVICE Set the host information about the transfer destinat...

Page 1252: ...is meaningless for the transmitting end The default setting is 104 SOPType SOP Class Type definition Although two options are selectable 1 FINP 2 OEM choose 1 CompType image data compression definitio...

Page 1253: ...INT LOCAL fcr5000n 2 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEVICE Set the host information about the 5000 Series image reader at the transfer destination fcr5000n 2 PRINT 0100 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS Set the IP address...

Page 1254: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 61 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 61 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1255: ...CONTENTS IN 62 4 Preparation for Installation Environment 4 1 Specifications of Machine Product Code CR IR341 Dimensions W730 x D720 x H1720 mm FR1B1000 EPS 1720 730 Unit mm 720 Weight 310 kg approx...

Page 1256: ...ired for installation differs depending on whether the machine is secured with the anchoring members or not Machine Rear Front FR1B1058 EPS 700 or more 100 or more Height 1800 or more Unit mm Machine...

Page 1257: ...ty 10 90 10 90 without condensation Atmospheric pressure 700 1 030hpa 500 1 030hpa The above environmental requirements do not apply to IPs Imaging Plates TR1H1017 EPS 40 80 Floor Installation Area Vi...

Page 1258: ...common specification Line Voltage 100VAC 10 or 200 240 VAC 10 Capacity 0 8kVA Power Cord 100 V 3 5 m 200 V 15 m Rated Amperage 100 V 8 A 200 V 4 A Overload Protection 100 V 200 V 15 A Power Consumpti...

Page 1259: ...for neces sary electrical utility water supply drain piping waste solution disposal and air conditioning system installation work Electrical Work Overseas For more detail local rules and regulations...

Page 1260: ...on sites Places where the temperature changes drastically Places near heat sources such as heaters Places where water leakage or equipment submersion may occur Places where the machine may be exposed...

Page 1261: ...rer CHAPMAN Remarks Midget ratchet set FR1H1724 EPS Qty 1 Type W 120 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Adjustable wrench 150mm FR1H1705 EPS Qty 1 Type P 245 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Water pump pliers FR1H1...

Page 1262: ...FR1H1733 EPS Qty 1 Type P 22 Manufacturer HOZAN Remarks Long nose pliers 150mm FR1H1707 EPS Qty 1 Type FLUKE77 Manufacturer FLUKE Digital tester FR1H1725 EPS Remarks Inspection and calibration requir...

Page 1263: ...Service Manual IN 69 1 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 69 1 Qty 1 Type JUMBO Manufacturer HURRICANE Remarks Blower FR1H1740 EPS Qty 1 Type Manufacturer Remarks Cloth FR1...

Page 1264: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 69 2 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 69 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1265: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 69 3 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 69 3 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1266: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 69 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 69 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1267: ...den crate Once the wooden crate is dismantled pull out the nails immediately If the crate pieces are left with nails attached someone or the machine may get hurt 1 Secure a transfer path of the machin...

Page 1268: ...cover is needed when placing the machine from the carrier pallet down onto the floor 3 Remove the wooden crate pieces and protective members except for the vinyl sheet left that directly covers the ma...

Page 1269: ...r clamps that fasten the machine to the carrier pallet If you use the removed clamps for machine installation bring them together with the machine to the installation site Carrier pallet Machine Loose...

Page 1270: ...he machine is unloaded If the top protective cover is used many times it may lose strength so that it may be broken when the machine is placed on it FR1B1093 EPS Top protective cover Rear of machine C...

Page 1271: ...lation place support it so that it will not topple down Because the machine is top heavy it may topple during transit If the machine should be moved over some step or bump move it as slowly as possibl...

Page 1272: ...each carton The service technician must keep the test result sheet 5 2 1 Machine main body Machine main body 1 Retainer 4 The machine retaining members also serve as retainers used during transit 8 3...

Page 1273: ...de assembly retaining screw BR M4x12 1 Erasure lamp assembly retaining screw BR M4x8 1 Power cable bracket retaining screw BR M4x8 spare 2 Optional board mounting screw truss M4x8 4 NK clamp NK 18N 13...

Page 1274: ...MC08A board DMS interface board 1 Required to establish local connection with the DMS IMG08B board multi frequency processing MFP optional board 1 Can be used for local connection with LP IMG08C board...

Page 1275: ...clamping and Installing Separate packaged Items 6 2 Unclamping and Installing Separate Packaged Items Except for Boards 6 2 4 Procedures at Side Positioning Conveyor Subscanning Unit and Power Supply...

Page 1276: ...t nothing is left unclamped 6 2 7 Unclamping Check List When removing tapes exercise care not to drop foam blocks or other irrelevant items into the machine When cutting cable ties ensure that no cutt...

Page 1277: ...out 6 Upper left hand side cover truss M4x12 x4 7 Lower left hand side cover truss M4x6 x3 truss M4x12 x6 While slightly pulling the top of the cover toward yourself pull it up and out exercising care...

Page 1278: ...2 CONTENTS Upper rear cover Lower rear cover Front inner cover Upper left hand side cover Lower left hand side cover Upper front cover Tape x3 Tape Lower front cover Upper right hand side cover Lower...

Page 1279: ...ure Conveyor and Before Side Positioning Conveyor A FRONT Unclamping Vertical Conveyor Pulling out Tray of Cassette Set Unit Unclamping Multi Stage Cassette Loading Cover Removing Multi Stage Cassette...

Page 1280: ...PLEMENTARY NOTES Be sure to reposition the brackets because they will be used as jigs for adjusting the cassette hold solenoid The two screws used to retain the vertical conveyor should be removed and...

Page 1281: ...sconnect the connectors CNA1 3 from the cassette set unit CNB1 3 4 from the up down IP removal unit CNT1 from the multi stage cassette loading cover 7 Slide the tensioner until the timing belt can be...

Page 1282: ...move the tape by slowly moving it horizon tally using care not to bend the IP removal arm 18 Remove the single tape that retains the IP removal arm located on the right hand side of the IP removal uni...

Page 1283: ...ve up the IP removal unit to about 10 20 mm 20 Remove the two tapes and two foam blocks for absorbing the shock that would be applied to the IP removal assembly when it falls FR1B1145 EPS Up down IP r...

Page 1284: ...e set unit horizontally along the positioning brackets 22 Secure the cassette set unit in place with six screws FRONT Cassette set unit Top stay of up down IP removal unit Push top stay of up down IP...

Page 1285: ...wn IP removal unit 26 Attach the timing belt to the timing belt wheel 27 Put the tensioner back where it was originally located Loosen the screw BR M4x8 that retains the tensioner Flick the timing bel...

Page 1286: ...over FR1B1110 EPS BR M4x8 x4 to be loosely retained 28 Scale Lower most shelf FR1B1300 EPS Manual release lever 0 5 1mm Scale Multi stage cassette loading cover Cassette set unit entry reference guide...

Page 1287: ...ning steps 30 for the topmost shelf first shelf before screwing it down SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES Because of parts machining precision the multi stage cassette loading cover may be slightly warped when secu...

Page 1288: ...single cable tie for retaining the branch path changeover guide driving solenoid SOLF1 FR1B1021 EPS Erasure conveyor 1 Cable tie Erasure conveyor FR1B1232 EPS 6 2 4 Procedures at Side Positioning Con...

Page 1289: ...serting the erasure lamp assembly align the positioning pin located on the right hand side of the inlet into the hole of the erasure lamp assembly and push it all the way into the erasure conveyor 4 U...

Page 1290: ...onveyor Unclamping Subscanning Unit Connect Power Cable and Check for Short B FRONT Procedures 1 Remove the single screw that retains the clamp and side positioning member SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE The screw...

Page 1291: ...at there is no offensive noise 6 Reinstall the transparent cover removed at step 3 7 Place in the REMOTE position the REMOTE LOCAL switch of the power supply unit located on the left hand side of the...

Page 1292: ...clamp 12 Set to ON the circuit breaker located on the left hand side of the machine ON OFF RESET SW Re mo te Lo ca l TB1 G E FG L N Remote Local FRONT FR1B1033 EPS Bracket BR M4x8 x2 Power cable NK cl...

Page 1293: ...of the check for power supply short take remedial action as appropriate with reference to 3 Troubleshooting Procedures Based on Improper Operation in Troubleshooting before proceeding to the next ste...

Page 1294: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 97 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 97 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1295: ...NTENTS IN 98 6 2 5 Procedures at Scanner Unit Workflow FR1B1234 EPS FRONT 6 2 6 Procedures at Controller 6 2 4 Procedures at Side Positioning Conveyor and Subscanning Unit D Pulling Out Scanner Unit U...

Page 1296: ...printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board 1 D...

Page 1297: ...of the SCN08A board 3 Remove the two screws that retain the scanner unit 4 Pull out the scanner unit NOTE When pulling out the scanner unit use care so that it is not caught by the connectors or cable...

Page 1298: ...rews that retain the brackets should be removed and kept separately 8 Connect the connector CNME2 removed at step 5 9 Remove the single screw from the light collecting guide retaining arm and rotate t...

Page 1299: ...alled with bare hands the light collecting guide assembly may be soiled or damaged Never touch the light receiving face of the light collecting guide assembly even when you are wearing the gloves Care...

Page 1300: ...ing the light collecting guide assembly align the protrusions located at both ends of the light receiving face of the light collecting guide assembly against the reference plane in the subscanning dir...

Page 1301: ...the arm portion is pushed the arm itself may be deformed 14 Secure the light collecting guide assembly in place with the mounting screw supplied and brace CAUTION Once the light collecting guide is s...

Page 1302: ...emove the single screw that retains the light collecting guide retaining bracket While holding the light collecting guide push in the PMT08A board assembly and adjust the position of the sockets of th...

Page 1303: ...cated on the front side of the machine put the scanner unit back into the machine until the stopper located on the rear side of the machine is activated 18 While pushing the stopper located on the rea...

Page 1304: ...on the SCN08A board are all shorted in the ON position The no fuse breakers NFB are to be shorted ON at factory prior to shipment and must be so at installation However since they may unexpectedly tu...

Page 1305: ...or later of the DRV08A board and version E or later of the SNS08A board the no fuse breaker NFB is replaced with the fuse so that checking procedures need not be performed Workflow FR1B1235 EPS Checki...

Page 1306: ...on by factory default and during installation Because it may be accidentally placed in the OFF position due to vibration during transit push each of the no fuse breaker buttons several times to ensure...

Page 1307: ...there is nothing unclamped from the machine Unclamping location Tape Foam block Cable tie Tag Screw kept separately 4 2 1 Removal of Covers 4 2 2 Procedures at Cassette Set Unit and Up Down IP Remova...

Page 1308: ...y If it is depressed too much it may remain depressed thereby causing OPEN CLOSE failure Especially do not strongly push it with a pen point or the like 6 3 1 MTH08A board CAUTION When servicing any p...

Page 1309: ...connect the connectors CN6 8 11 18 19 from the CPU90E board FRONT FR1B1175 EPS MTH08A board Loosen Truss M4x8 CPU90E board 3 Remove screw Truss M4x8 3 ON OFF RES ET SW Re mo te Lo cal FRONT MTH08A boa...

Page 1310: ...ctory default and during installation Because it may be accidentally placed in the OFF position due to vibration during transit push each of the no fuse breaker buttons several times to ensure that th...

Page 1311: ...m so that its installation procedures should be performed CR IR341 2849 2852 2854 2858 2860 2863 2868 2873 2883 2894 Install the MMC90A boards the memory modules to the connectors CN17 18 of the MTH08...

Page 1312: ...llowing procedures to remove the MMC90A board If the procedures are not observed the connector tab s may be damaged 1 Push out the left tab of the connector 2 Press out the left end of the MMC90A boar...

Page 1313: ...on due to vibration during transit push each of the no fuse breaker buttons several times to ensure that they are all depressed to ON OFF position ON position No fuse breaker status FR1B1147 EPS NOTE...

Page 1314: ...08A board Push the CPU90E board supplied into the bottom slot and secure it in place with two mounting screws supplied FR1B1178 EPS MTH08A board CPU90E board FRONT MTH08A board CPU90E board Truss M4x8...

Page 1315: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 115 3 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 115 3 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1316: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 115 4 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 115 4 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1317: ...en servicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted...

Page 1318: ...1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS 2 Install the IMG07B board to the MTH08A board Push the IMG07B board supplied into the second slot from the bottom and secure it in place with two screws supplied FR1B1179 EPS MTH08...

Page 1319: ...ions do not support a newer LSI discontinuation supported on the daughter board ETH90F board of the CPU90F board 1 For the CPU90F board make sure that the no fuse breakers are all shorted in the ON po...

Page 1320: ...W1 NFB1 NFB2 CN2 CN1 T4 DIS1 DIS2 T1 2 ETH90F board CNSI0 Short pin FR1B1136 EPS 1 2 3 3 2 1 No short pin OPEN 4 3 2 1 OFF position ON position OFF position ON position 4 3 2 1 Set to 6 LAN90B board 6...

Page 1321: ...below its original position If there is no free slot the slot cover should be kept in another place for later use 4 Install the CPU90F board or LAN90B board to the MTH08A board Push the CPU90F board o...

Page 1322: ...vicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the...

Page 1323: ...t located below its original position If there is no free slot the slot cover should be kept in another place for later use 3 Install the HCP08A board to the MTH08A board Push the HCP08A board into th...

Page 1324: ...vicing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the...

Page 1325: ...nt slot located below its original position If there is no free slot the slot cover should be kept in another place for later use 3 Install the DMC08A board to the MTH08A board Push the DMC08A board i...

Page 1326: ...static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board 1 Make sure that S1 on the IMG08C board is set to...

Page 1327: ...wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board IMG08H Board CR IR341 1 Make sure that S1 on the IMG08H b...

Page 1328: ...FR1B1196 EPS CN5 CN4 CN3 CN6 S1 Set to 1 CN1 CN2 IMG08B Board CR IR361 1 Make sure that S1 on the IMG08B board is set to 2 2 Insert the IMG08B board to the MTH08A board Push the IMG08B board into the...

Page 1329: ...cing any printed circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the b...

Page 1330: ...slot located below its original position If there is no free slot the slot cover should be kept in another place for later use 3 Install the IMG08A board to the MTH08A board Push the IMG08A board int...

Page 1331: ...nted circuit board be sure to wear an anti static wristband to ensure proper grounding If not static electricity built on the human body may cause damage to electric parts mounted on the board Install...

Page 1332: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 129 2 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 129 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1333: ...BASE T I F cable HUB 10BASE T ID T741 VGA monitor HUB 100BASE T or 10BASE T LP I F cable DMS I F cable Monitor I F cable Remote switch I F cable Modem I F cable Modem 100BASE T or 10BASE T I F cable N...

Page 1334: ...t FRONT High voltage switch 1 6 5 Preparations for Power ON 1 Turn OFF the high voltage switch S1 of the SCN08A board WARNING Be sure to turn OFF the high voltage switch before powering ON with the co...

Page 1335: ...051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 132 3 Make sure that the REMOTE LOCAL switch is placed in the REMOTE position 4 Make sure that the system power is in the OFF position FRONT...

Page 1336: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 133 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN 133 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS BLANK PAGE...

Page 1337: ...ribution switchboard 2 Turn ON the circuit breaker located on the left hand side of the machine The circuitry of the machine is powered but the machine does not start up yet be cause the system power...

Page 1338: ...e checked for operation are located at four points Make sure that they operated during the initialization sequence of the machine Fan located on upper portion of right hand side Two intake fans monito...

Page 1339: ...s press Stop Alarm 6 Make sure that the machine starts up normally An example of operation panel screen appearing when the machine has started up normally is shown below FR1H1488 EPS Routine screen sc...

Page 1340: ...any measured value differs from the specified value rotate the associated voltage adjust ment trimmer adjustment point as needed Measurement point Adjustment point Specified value TB2 1 3 5V 5 1 5 3V...

Page 1341: ...Routine screen screen made to CSL specification U Utility screen Utility Return 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILI...

Page 1342: ...ta DST Output LP information NET LOCAL JNL Error log information LIF Format frequency information MFC Setup options information CSL for CSL specification only Multiframe related information set proces...

Page 1343: ...FR1H1487 EPS U Utility screen Deleting images waiting for processing Processed image reproduction output Click sound Date time setup FD operation Touch panel parallax correction Multiframe forced out...

Page 1344: ...the ENT key to confirm the entry When the setting is confirmed OK appears below the entry column If the date or time is entered incorrectly touch the BS key backspace key to return to the character t...

Page 1345: ...ally set with reference to the worksheets that were created in 3 Determination of Configuration Information 3 Determination of Configuration Information Flow of Configuration File Setting Is there any...

Page 1346: ...g file saving The FD or FD drive may be damaged Once a setup file is installed be sure to reset the machine after exiting M Utility After installing the setup file do not change the FNT language setti...

Page 1347: ...ea to be touched FR1B1086 EPS Routine screen screen made to CSL specification U Utility screen Utility Return 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCAN...

Page 1348: ...CONFIGURATION DATA 3 NETWORK DATA 4 IMAGE PROCESSING DATA 5 CSL MENU DATA FUT RES 2 FR1B1201 EPS 0 SP D E F A B C 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 DEL BS ENT Caps Of the setup files the following files are saved fro...

Page 1349: ...sequence Of the setup files the following files are saved from the floppy disk to the hard disk REMOTE SWITCH RMT_SW CFG EQUIPMENT EQUIP NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEVICE HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS DISTRIBUTION...

Page 1350: ...requirements over serial line connection 6 NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEVICE Define setup information for network connected communication 7 HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS Set up the address for network connection 8...

Page 1351: ...orean Option is necessary IPS 172 16 0 1 3 IP Address CPU90E Length 15 E F A B C 7 8 9 4 5 6 1 2 3 DEL SAVE sb0 SYSTEM ETC IRSET CFG CANCEL BS ENT Caps FR1B1208 EPS How to Edit Each Setup File A speci...

Page 1352: ...s deleted SUPPLEMENTARY NOTE If you edited the file incorrectly and it is difficult to undo the editing with the DEL or BS key press the CANCEL key and repeat from step 1 all over again 4 Press the SA...

Page 1353: ...to be touched FR1B1086 EPS Routine screen screen made to CSL specification U Utility screen Utility Return 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNE...

Page 1354: ...s if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP the file cannot be read during RESTORE 7 0 QUIT 1 FORMAT FD 2 FORMAT IMAGE PARTITION 3 BACK UP 4 RESTORE 5 EDR DATA 6 PREVIOUS SYSTE...

Page 1355: ...OM NOTE The menu parameters saved in the floppy disk also contain the language setting for the machine Thus if the language setting differs during RESTORE and during BACK UP the file cannot be read du...

Page 1356: ...4 Resetting Machine In order to make changes to the configuration files effective reset the machine Machine Resetting Procedures 1 Power OFF the machine 2 Power ON the machine 3 Make sure that the se...

Page 1357: ...U Utility mode 3 Touch the upper left corner and upper right corner of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated Area to be touched FR1B1086 EPS Routine screen screen made to CSL specifi...

Page 1358: ...Ps are conveyed in order of cassettes inserted The exhaust fan FANF1 mounted on the erasure lamp assembly operates 9 After IP conveyance is completed take out all the cassettes and make sure that the...

Page 1359: ...4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 156 13 Touch the upper left and upper right corners of the operation panel in sequence M Utility is activated 14 Select 3 TEST MODE and 1 ROUTINE MODE in sequence 15 Repe...

Page 1360: ...to the lower rear cover with NK clamps When installing the lower rear cover secure the I F cable onto the lower rear cover with three screws truss M4x20 and NK clamps supplied as separate packaged ite...

Page 1361: ...ng between the above two installa tion methods CAUTION In order to avoid electric shock hazards power OFF the machine before performing any proce dures Installation Space Required for Final Placement...

Page 1362: ...floor surface 4 Mark the floor surface to indicate the clamp hole locations 504 8 125 2 78 8 78 8 769 7 755 2 125 2 Unit mm F R O N T FR1B1228 EPS Anchor hole location Clamp Anchor nut M12x50 x2 Mach...

Page 1363: ...mbed the anchor nuts in the locations marked at step 4 7 Move the machine back to the installation location and secure the earthquake protec tion members onto both the machine and anchor nuts 8 Tighte...

Page 1364: ...communication 1 Make sure that the unit connected has been powered ON 2 Power ON the machine 3 Make sure that the machine starts up normally The screen of the operation panel with the machine started...

Page 1365: ...DT A screen prompting you to select an exposure region appears 3 Select an exposure region 4 Scan the barcode of the cassette with the barcode reader of the IDT 5 Put the cassette into the machine 6 M...

Page 1366: ...sec 2 Make recording in SENSITIVITY from the test menu of the IDT and generate output 3 Make sure that the resulting image is free from ununiformity on the output film or display monitor If any ununif...

Page 1367: ...m The IP exposure conditions are as follows Distance 1 8m Voltage 80kV Amperage 50mA Time 0 013sec How to expose the steel rules is illustrated below 2 Make recording in SENSITIVITY from the test menu...

Page 1368: ...oubleshooting The distance measured on the film may differ from the actual size measured on the IP depending on the reading size For example for a two in one image of 14 x 14 35cm x 35cm size because...

Page 1369: ...the employed output pattern FR1B1119 EPS PEM information or Ene Sub superposition information u b c a d Normal two image output Image f g i j l s m k n o p r q t h u Character display area B Characte...

Page 1370: ...A A A 14 x 17 8 x 10 four image output Image Image Image Image FR1B1123 EPS FR1B1124 EPS A Image Image B Image Image Four image output of a size other than 14 x 17 8 x 10 18 x 43 long two image output...

Page 1371: ...n One of the following may be selected for the type of error messages to be outputted Error Messages Only Warning Messages Only and All Messages For the type of error messages designated one of the fo...

Page 1372: ...IN 169 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS 8 8 Checking Machine Shutdown Check for System Remote OFF Function Make sure that when the power switch of the operation panel is turned OFF the machine and exte...

Page 1373: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN 170 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 8 A1 A2 CONTENTS IN 170 8 9 Cleaning Covers Clean all the covers with a moistened cloth...

Page 1374: ...this line Exposure markers precaution label Be sure to remove all exposure markers before inserting the cassette Exposure markers precaution label Upper front cover Front shelf cover 20mm 20mm 8 10 A...

Page 1375: ...R348CL and CPU Board Board connected to IDT IV CPU90E CPU90F When IDT IV is connected to CPU90E DMS is connected to the DMC08A board DMS is connected to the CPU90F board over 100BASE TX When IDT IV is...

Page 1376: ...During installation procedures perform configuration setup with reference to this worksheet Appendix 2 1 SYSTEM IRSET CFG 3 1 1 List of SYSTEM IRSET CFG Setup Items Initial value IRSET ORG CFG IDT 1...

Page 1377: ...itted SMJ 5000 7 System Name Length 6 5000 Change not permitted SID 8 System ID Length 1 A A Z SFC 9 Manual Sensitivity Settting CSL Type 0 0 OFF 1 Standard Semi High Speed 2 Standard Semi High Speed...

Page 1378: ...2 OverXray Flag 0 0 LOG MESSAGE 1 LOG ONLY 2 NONE Change not necessary U_MF 13 User UTL Multi Frame Button Control 0 0 OFF 1 ON SS1 14 Screen Save Timer 5 0 60 min ITV 15 Time put at each image store...

Page 1379: ...998 4 AMERICAN SHORT DATE 04 01 1998 5 EUROPEAN LONG DATE 01 APR 1998 6 EUROPEAN SHORT DATE 01 04 1998 ID_SEARCH 22 Search Key CSL Type 0 0 ID 1 ID RECEPT 2 ID EXAM 3 ID RECEPT EXAM ID_LENGTH 23 Patie...

Page 1380: ...Length CSL Type 10 1 10 ID_INFO_TYPE 0 1 16 ID_INFO_TYPE 1 EXAM_PADDING 28 Examination No Padding method CSL Type 0 0 Pad with space to the head Ex 1234567 1 Pad with zero to the head Ex 0001234567 2...

Page 1381: ...6 Space 4 FilmChar1 6 7 Dep Code 4 MPMcode 4 Space 2 3 6 Not Available for HIC655 HIC655QA QA WS771 store reprint PTR 0 34 FilmChar1 MenuName Start Pointer 0 Indent UNQ 0 35 Film Sort Unique Code 0 0...

Page 1382: ...ing buttons icon control for OEM 1 SELECT PRINTER User UTL DELETE PRINTING IMAGES S of DELETE WAITING IMAGES User UTL The number of sheets of print icon of REOUTPUT IMAGE User UTL and Manual EDR 0 OFF...

Page 1383: ...ient ID 4 org root 2 4 Study Date Patient ID 2 Requesting Service Note 1 org root 1 2 392 200036 9125 2 When Study Date cannot be acquired Acquisition Date is used DEF_DENSITY 46 Image Density Device...

Page 1384: ...en Save Display 0 0 Black Screen 1 Pictures DST_PADDING 53 Distribution Code Padding method 2 0 Pad with space to the head Ex 1234 1 Pad with zero to the head Ex 00001234 2 Pad with space to the tail...

Page 1385: ...enable 0 OFF 1 ON ID_EXAM 59 Examination No Display Mode CSL Type 0 0 NO DISPLAY AND INPUT 1 DISPLAY AND INPUT ID_DEPT 60 Department Name Display Mode CSL Type 0 0 NO DISPLAY AND INPUT 1 DISPLAY AND I...

Page 1386: ...rted 1 Converted PN_FDS 65 FINP COMPONENT DELIMITER FOR SINGLE BYTE 0 REPRESENTATION 0 Space 1 Caret 2 Comma PN_FDM 66 FINP COMPONENT DELIMITER FOR MULTI BYTE 0 REPRESENTATION 0 Space 1 Caret 2 Comma...

Page 1387: ...SINGLE BYTE REPRESENTATION FGM This definition is used when the FINP data contains 3 components F Family name G Given name M Middle name P Prefix S Suffix PN_FCS4 70 FINP COMPOSITION FOR SINGLE BYTE...

Page 1388: ...R MULTI BYTE REPRESENTATION FG This definition is used when the FINP data contains 2 components F Family name G Given name M Middle name P Prefix S Suffix PN_FCM3 74 FINP COMPOSITION FOR MULTI BYTE RE...

Page 1389: ...name M Middle name P Prefix S Suffix PN_DD 77 DICOM COMPONENT DELIMITER 1 0 Space 1 Caret 2 Comma PN_DC 78 DICOM COMPOSITION FGMPS F Family name G Given name M Middle name P Prefix S Suffix MON 79 di...

Page 1390: ...RG CFG BF 1 Print barcode 1 0 No 1 Yes EF 2 Print EDR mode 1 0 No 1 Yes IF 3 Print image process condition 1 0 No 1 Yes CF 4 Print L S CS SS condition 1 0 No 1 Yes ET 5 Print shot day 1 0 No 1 Yes HN...

Page 1391: ...Yes MF 10 Print menu 1 0 No 1 Yes A1 11 Maximum age of monthly representation 7 0 99 A2 12 Maximum age of daily representation 0 0 12 TH 13 Trimming mammo 0 0 25 mm TE 14 Trimming others 0 0 25 mm CL...

Page 1392: ...0 14 17 film 18 43 LR 2on1 format 0 No 1 Yes FR4 19 Print image frame 0 14 17 film 14 17 18 43 8 10 4on1 format 0 No 1 Yes CR 20 Print compression rate 0 0 No 1 Yes MM 21 Margin 0 0 Margin depend on i...

Page 1393: ...14 17 14 14 film character field 0 Size format 14 17 Single 18 43 LR 2on1 14 17 4on1 18 43 4on1 8 10 4on1 14 14 Single 8 10 Single 0 Both of field 1 2 1 Only field 1 2 Only field 2 3 None CSX0 27 Cha...

Page 1394: ...size 668 2 668 0 1mm CLY1 34 Character Area1 Large vertical size 180 2 180 0 1mm FD1417 0010 FD1714 1131 FD1843 0010 FD0810 0010 FD1008 1131 FD1414 0010 35 14 17 14 14 film character field position r...

Page 1395: ...tion rotation user definition rules If processing menu code matches MPM1 MPM2 or FC1 4 14 17 14 14 B4 8 10film FC5 6 8 10film MPM8 max 8 menus the character fields change the position rotation due to...

Page 1396: ...R9000 compatible 1 Yes LTC 40 Long type character format 0 0 No default 1 Yes Refer to JSTFY of irset cfg for details of the long type item FRSC XXXX XXXX 41 No print scale XXXX XXXX user definition r...

Page 1397: ...Sheet FCR5000 Setup date Prepared by Host unit name REMOTE SWITCH RMT_SW CFG EQUIPMENT EQUIP Host model name IP address Machine manufacture serial number Ethernet address Installation site NOPK 1000 O...

Page 1398: ...100 odf624 DISPLAY OD_FILE 0100 fn ps551 DISPLAY PRINT 0100 hic654 FUJI Network System Administration Sheet FCR5000 Setup date April 20 1999 Prepared by Host unit name REMOTE SWITCH RMT_SW CFG EQUIPME...

Page 1399: ...ouch the upper left corner of the operation panel and then the upper right corner within 2 seconds M Utility starts When the screen reads STEP95 the operation panel is inoperative and does not respond...

Page 1400: ...UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP MEMORY 9 HV OFF 10 MENU SETTING M Utility screen Deleting images waiting...

Page 1401: ...o that the change is effective NOTE If M Utility is entered during initialization sequence 0 QUIT does not appear Thus after quitting M Utility the machine should be reset How to Exit M Utility 1 Sele...

Page 1402: ...in sequence 1 NUMBER menu is automatically selected 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 MECHANICAL UTILITY 7 FILE UTILITY 8 BACKUP...

Page 1403: ...active Select STOP When STOP is selected the operation DRIVE of the actuator or motor is ended 0 QUIT 1 ERROR LOG UTILITY 2 CONFIGURATION SETTING 3 TEST MODE 4 ELECTRICAL UTILITY 5 SCANNER UTILITY 6 M...

Page 1404: ...s of virtual keyboards are available by touching the or key one of the three virtual keyboards can be selected Also by touching the Caps key the caps mode can be toggled to the lower cap display corre...

Page 1405: ...key DEL key Each time you touch this key it erases the character above the cursor BS key Each time you touch this key it erases the character preceding positioned to the left of the cursor position Ex...

Page 1406: ...r Requirements External monitor Commercially available VGA monitor Connector D sub 15 pin male connector should be provided Monitor extension cable Commercially available VGA monitor cable Network cab...

Page 1407: ...ould be set Select All node on the network in Network Environment and click New to set the follow ing items 1 Node name 2 IP address 3 Using protocol number 100 4 Machine code 5 CR image hardcopy prop...

Page 1408: ...disk into the floppy disk drive 3 Select 7 FILE UTILITY and 7 EXECUTION in sequence The files contained in the floppy disk are displayed 1 OPTION ABS 2 INSTALL 3 UNINST 4 OPTION 008 4 Select item No 2...

Page 1409: ...ters and menu parameters exposure menus Before editing the parameters for the machine with the Menu Editor perform Menu Editor settings in accordance with the following procedures How to Start 1 Power...

Page 1410: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN_A8 2 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006 IN_A8 2 CONTENTS A8 5 Click Yes The PC ME Property window appears...

Page 1411: ...R347 only function for mammography should be disabled 1 Set the following items in the PC ME Property window MFP Multi frequency processing DRC Dynamic range compression processing TAS Tomographic art...

Page 1412: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN_A8 4 009 051 06 04 20 2001 FM3006 IN_A8 4 CONTENTS A8 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1413: ...ures for Connecting with CR Console CR IR348CL When the CR IR341 is to be connected to the CR Console CR IR348CL reference should be made to the following manual bundled CR IR341P 342P 343P 344P 345P...

Page 1414: ...CR IR341 Service Manual IN_A9 2 009 051 07 08 30 2001 FM3115 IN_A9 2 BLANK PAGE...

Page 1415: ...Connection Setting in CL s Service Utility 19 3 4 Installing the Console Display Software Installing in CL s PC 20 3 5 Setting the IR Configuration Regarding CL Connection Setting in M Utility 22 3 6...

Page 1416: ...following terms used herein are abbreviated as follows CR IR348CL CL CR IR341P 342P 343P 344P 345P 347P 348RU IR Local printer LP The software versions of the IR that is connectable to the CL are as f...

Page 1417: ...functions Optimizing the display view Connecting and setting the barcode reader and magnetic card reader 00000050 EPS TO STEP 2 1 Overall Work Flow The procedures for installing the CL IR and or LP fo...

Page 1418: ...r the source CL DICOM setting Setting for the destination IR DICOM setting Setting for ID information exchange FINP setting etc EQUIPMENT EQUIP NETWORK HOST INTERFACE DEVICE HOSTS ADDRESS HOSTS DICOM...

Page 1419: ...ion Step 1 After performing hardware setups such as cable connection perform software setups for activating the CL Perform configuration settings on the CL and IR that are network connected in one to...

Page 1420: ...s Installing accessory and optional items Cable connection with the IR Cable connection with the LP Software related setups Checking date time and time zone Installing the touch panel driver Installin...

Page 1421: ...Two or More IRs 00000052 EPS Click first on the upper left corner and then on the upper right corner 00000045 EPS 3 Step 2 Preliminary Installation Procedures for network connecting the CL and IR in...

Page 1422: ...7P 348RU Service Manual 7 009 064 01 08 30 2001 FM3145 7 00000007 EPS 00000008 EPS Setting for the Source CL 1 Click Setup Configuration Item The Configuration Item dialog box appears 2 Click 3 Click...

Page 1423: ...4 Select in the Add Node portion and click The Application Entity List dialog box appears 5 Perform the following settings in the Application Entity List dialog box I Type in the Application Entity N...

Page 1424: ...the DICOM Setup dialog box I Select PrivateUnstandardizedCRStorage II Select SCP III Select JPEG Lossless IV Select ST HQ When the 5000MA is connected select ST HQ SH V Select HQ SH VI If two byte ch...

Page 1425: ...dialog box 2 Click The New Node dialog box appears 3 Type in the host name of the IR fcr5501 n NOTE in and the IP address of the IR 172 16 0 2 in NOTE NOTE The default host names for the respective m...

Page 1426: ...rm the following settings in the Application Entity List dialog box I Type in the Application Entity Name of the IR for example DICOM_IR DICOM_IR is set by default for every IR II Select either BUILTI...

Page 1427: ...Storage II Select SCU III Select JPEG Lossless IV Select the film output destination Select IIP when the LP is connected to the CL or FCR5000 when the LP is connected to the IR NOTE If the XU D1 is co...

Page 1428: ...is setting may be omitted for a cassette based reader If it is omitted communication between the reader and CL operates as FINP110 1 Click host name of the destination in the Setup Configuration Item...

Page 1429: ...EPS I II III 4 Perform the following settings in the FINP Setup dialog box I Select either BUILTIN or CASSETTE 5000 5000R 5000MA CASSETTE 5501H 5501D 5502D XU D1 BUILTIN II Select ST HQ When the 5000...

Page 1430: ...020 EPS Saving the Configuration and Quitting the Service Utility 1 Choose Save from the Config F menu in the Setup Configuration Item dialog box A confirmation dialog box appears 2 Click The settings...

Page 1431: ...lector When the cassette device is to be connected it has been registered by default so that its registration process need not be performed NOTES Up to 16 cassette devices and up to two built in devic...

Page 1432: ...echnique Code that does not overlap with any other selector III Select the device to be added to the selector by way of host name IV Select Reader Type 5501H 5501D XU D1 5501 5502D 5502 To revert back...

Page 1433: ...the cassette device that has been set by default should be deleted 1 Select the Selector 1 tab 2 Change Technique Code to 1 4 Click Back to the Service Utility screen 5 Click the Exit Service Utility...

Page 1434: ...45 19 3 3 Setting the CL Configuration Regarding LP Connection Setting in CL s Service Utility Configuration settings for connecting the LP to the CL are performed 2 Software Setup of Connection with...

Page 1435: ...n the CL uninstall it REFERENCE The console display software is an application program called Built_in Console found in Add Remove Programs in the Control Panel Appendix A Uninstalling Various Applica...

Page 1436: ...01 08 30 2001 FM3145 21 00000024 EPS 00000025 EPS 00000026 EPS 6 Click Installation starts After the installation the following dialog box appears 7 Click A window prompting you to restart the PC app...

Page 1437: ...S ENT Caps U Utility button 4 3 2 1 XXXX 0 3 5 Setting the IR Configuration Regarding CL Connection Setting in M Utility Start the M Utility and set the configuration files For more detail on the M Ut...

Page 1438: ...H 5501D 5502D XU D1 1 Turn ON the powers in the following sequence Breaker of the power distribution switchboard Breaker of the IR When the IR is booted up a message FUJI COMPUTED RADIOGRAPHY ap pears...

Page 1439: ...CR IR341P 342P 343P 344P 345P 347P 348RU Service Manual 24 009 064 01 08 30 2001 FM3145 24 00000028 EPS 3 Click once on each of the areas shown below The M Utility screen appears...

Page 1440: ...se for XU D1 The contents of the configuration files vary depending on the machine For more detail see the Service Manual for each IR EQUIP file Select 4 EQUIPMENT EQUIP Function Hn name Host Name Fun...

Page 1441: ...Hex 2 figures Speed Dec Kbytes sec default 8Kbytes sec DensityType Output Image Density Default1 1 Standard Density or High Quality Density Max Pixel Spacing 100 2 Standard Density or High Quality De...

Page 1442: ...eout sec 0 endless DensityType Output Image Density 0 Standard Density 1 Standard Density or High Quality Density Which Density is to be chosen depends on ID Information ex fcr5501 n STORAGE_U DPR_DIC...

Page 1443: ...P 1 Turn ON the breaker of the IR After a while an IR initialization message appears on the monitor of the CL and the IR gets ready for operation in a few minutes NOTE when the built in device is used...

Page 1444: ...EPS Reading the IP and Film Output to the LP For 5000 5000R 5000MA 1 Use the barcode reader to register the IP barcode and set the cassette into the IR The image read is transferred to the CL 2 Click...

Page 1445: ...0 2001 FM3145 30 Image read 00000030 EPS For 5501H 5501D 5502D XU D1 1 Send a shot signal to read an image of the IP The image read is transferred to the CL 2 Click Quit Examination on the upper right...

Page 1446: ...P 345P 347P 348RU Service Manual 31 009 064 01 08 30 2001 FM3145 31 Quitting the CL AP 1 Click on the upper right corner of the screen The menus appear 2 While holding down the SHIFT key click The CL...

Page 1447: ...tion IR and Setting for ID Information Exchange in 3 1 Setting the CL Configuration Regarding IR Connection Setting in CL s Service Utility 3 For the built in device perform selector setting 3 2 Setti...

Page 1448: ...age processing parameters from the CL to the IR This setting should be made as needed If the software version for the CL is A02 image processing parameters are communicated via the CPU90E board A netw...

Page 1449: ...described in the following reference should be performed together with the procedures described in the above work flow Appendix 1 Setup for Connecting Multiple CLs to a Single 5000 Cassette based Read...

Page 1450: ...and IR as appropriate IR host name IP address Application Entity name CL host name IP address Application Entity name Port No Subnet mask of the overall network NOTE The procedures described in this s...

Page 1451: ...ed by a circle depending on the network information changed NOTES The SYSTEM configuration should be set in the 2 SYSTEM menu of 2 CON FIGURATION SETTING in the M Utility For the IP address setting in...

Page 1452: ...d fcr5501 n STORAGE_U DPR_DICOM 2 1 100 600 1 dest 1 STORAGE_P DPR_DICOM 21760 2 1 100 600 1 fcr5501 n STORAGE_U CRXUD1_02_U 1 1 100 600 1 CRxxxxxxxx STORAGE_P CL_02_P 10113 1 1 100 600 1 REFERENCE If...

Page 1453: ...host name involves complicated procedures such as reinstalling the MSDE Be sure to observe the procedures described in the CR IR346 348CL Service Manual to change the CL host name Subnet Mask CL IP A...

Page 1454: ...CR IR341P 342P 343P 344P 345P 347P 348RU Service Manual 39 009 064 01 08 30 2001 FM3145 39 00000032 EPS 4 Select and click The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties dialog box appears...

Page 1455: ...0 2001 FM3145 40 00000033 EPS CL host name Subnet mask 5 Make sure that is selected and change the IP address or subnet mask 6 Click Back to the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box 7 Click Clo...

Page 1456: ...ng and Quitting the Service Utility of Maintenance Utility MU in the CR IR346 348CL Service Manual 2 Click the Setup Configuration Item button The Setup Configuration Item dialog box appears 3 Click I...

Page 1457: ...ty of the CL 1 Procedures for Starting and Quitting the Service Utility of Maintenance Utility MU in the CR IR346 348CL Service Manual 2 Click the Setup Configuration Item button The Setup Configurati...

Page 1458: ...L 1 Procedures for Starting and Quitting the Service Utility of Maintenance Utility MU in the CR IR346 348CL Service Manual 2 Click the Setup Configuration Item button The Setup Configuration Item dia...

Page 1459: ...has been changed when the IR has been incorporated into the hospital network the selector should be re set NOTE If the host name of the built in device has been changed be sure to re set the selector...

Page 1460: ...EPS I II 3 Perform selector setting I Select the tab where the built in device has been registered II Because this field is vacant choose the host name of the built in device 4 Click Back to the Serv...

Page 1461: ...d back up the CL configuration files to two floppy disks 5 Restoring and Backing Up Configuration Files Configuration Restore Backup of Maintenance Utility MU in the CR IR346 348CL Service Manual 4 6...

Page 1462: ...CR IR341P 342P 343P 344P 345P 347P 348RU Service Manual 47 009 064 01 08 30 2001 FM3145 47...

Page 1463: ...hare function are de scribed here 1 1 General Description Distribution code The distribution code is set to determine in which CL the image read by the reader is regis tered for identification Unless...

Page 1464: ...cassette based reader 00000056 EPS Equipment file IDT CL a 5000 based cassette reader 5 ID information return 6 ID information return CL a 5000 CLa CL b 5000 CLb 2 Reading 3 ID information inquiry 4...

Page 1465: ...e CLs connected to the reader Setting of distribution code 1 Start the Service Utility of the CL 2 Click the Setup Configuration Item button The Setup Configuration Item dialog box appears 3 Click 000...

Page 1466: ...2001 FM3145 51 Patient information sharing setup 1 Start the Service Utility of the CL 2 Click the Setup Configuration Item button A Setup Configuration Item window opens 3 Click 00000060 EPS The rig...

Page 1467: ...device IV Set GroupName NOTE If GroupName is set for the first time type in GroupName by use of a keyboard since there is no entry in the GroupName field V To set this device as a GateWay device chec...

Page 1468: ...me Function DISPLAY or IDT Host Name HostName Network Hostname def by hosts IDT CL a CL b DISPLAY CL a REFERENCES Up to five IDT units may be specified in the IDT CL a setup item When IDT CL a CL b CL...

Page 1469: ...bute setting should always be de leted EQUIP Function Hn name Host Name Function DISPLAY or IDT Host Name HostName Network Hostname def by hosts IDT CL a CL b DISPLAY CL a Delete Setting of distributi...

Page 1470: ...e CL a P Port number 5001 Distribution code 5000 CLa IP address 172 16 1 20 AE name CL b P Port number 5002 Distribution code 5000 CLb IP address 172 16 1 30 AE name CL c P Port number 5003 Distributi...

Page 1471: ...R 1 STORAGE_U IR 1 U 1 1 100 600 1 CL a STORAGE_P CL a P 5001 1 1 100 600 1 CL b STORAGE_P CL b P 5002 1 1 100 600 1 IR 2 Configuration Files EQUIP file IDT CL a CL b CL c CL b and CL c should be set...

Page 1472: ...064 01 08 30 2001 FM3145 57 Codedstb file 5000 CLa CL a 5000 CLb CL b 5000 CLc CL c Base on DICOM file IR 1 STORAGE_U IR 1 U 1 1 100 600 1 CL a STORAGE_P CL a P 5001 1 1 100 600 1 CL b STORAGE_P CL b...

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands